Horizon 2 Mini

Installation and Conguration:
Horizon II mini
68P02903W22-D
2003 - 2007 Motorola, Inc.
Dec 2007
All Rights Reserved
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no
liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained
herein. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability,
function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content
hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability
arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or
information about Motorola products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced
in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce
such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This document, Motorola products, and 3rd Party Software products described in this document may include
or describe copyrighted Motorola and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola, its licensors, and
other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right
to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly,
any copyrighted material of Motorola, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the
Motorola products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed,
merged or modied in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase
of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola or other 3rd Party supplied software,
except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a
product.
A list of 3rd Party supplied software copyrights are contained in the Supplemental information section of this
document.
Restrictions
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part
of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission
of Motorola, Inc.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc and its licensors. It is furnished by express
license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
High Risk Materials
Components, units, or 3rd Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT
designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication
Systems, Air Trafc Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities). Motorola and its supplier(s)
specically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of tness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
Motorola and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Ofce. All other product or service
names are the property of their respective owners.
The CE mark conrms Motorola, Inc. statement of compliance with EU directives applicable to this product. Copies
of the Declaration of Compliance and installation information in accordance with the requirements of EN50385 can
be obtained from the local Motorola representative or by contacting the Customer Network Resolution Center
(CNRC). The 24 hour telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the
internet, contact the Local Motorola Ofce.
Dec 2007
Table
of
Contents
Contents
Installation and Conguration: Horizon II mini

Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version information . . . . . . . .
Resolution of service requests . . .
Incorporation of Change Notices. .
General information . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross references . . . . . . . . . .
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting Motorola . . . . . . . . . .
24hour support . . . . . . . . . .
Questions and comments . . . . .
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security advice. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings, cautions, and notes . . . . .
Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General safety . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic energy . . . . . .
Caring for the environment . . . . . .
In EU countries . . . . . . . . . .
In non-EU countries . . . . . . . .
CMM labeling and disclosure table . .
Motorola document set . . . . . . . .
Ordering documents and CD-ROMs
Document banner denitions . . .
Data encryption . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
11
11
11
11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
Chapter 1: Introduction to Horizon II mini

Finding information in this manual. . . . . .
Manual scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction and site preparation . . . . . .
Tool list for Horizon II mini . . . . . . . . .
Preparation overview . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of site preparation . . . . . . .
Pre-installation procedures . . . . . . .
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of requirements . . . . . . . .
Introduction to Horizon II mini specications
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
Approval and safety . . . . . . . . . . . .

Software requirements. . . . . . . . . . .
Access control requirements . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini physical specications . . . . .
Cabinet and outdoor enclosure dimensions
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural considerations . . . . . . . . .
Layout plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini electrical and RF specications
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency capability. . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC connectivity options. . . . . . . . . .
Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before leaving for the site . . . . . . . . .
Arrival at site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waste material on site . . . . . . . . . . .
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base site structure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site owner provision . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site installation layout . . . . . . . . . . .
Earthing an outdoor site . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earthing requirements . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth electrode system . . . . . . . . . .
Cross bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earthing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth electrode testing . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing outdoor foundations. . . . . . . . .
Foundation depth . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor foundation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constructing the foundation . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-23
1-24
1-24
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-28
1-29
1-29
1-29
1-31
1-31
1-31
1-32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
Chapter 2: Horizon II mini cabinet indoor installation

Horizon II mini indoor cabinet installation overview . . .
Introduction to installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet components . . . . .
E1 line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet delivery and unpacking .
Before unpacking the equipment. . . . . . . . . . .
Safety requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packaging crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment module packaging . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the crate, mounting brackets and cabinet
Safe disposal of packing material . . . . . . . . . .
CTU2 allotted slot retention . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor mounting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Floor mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indoor wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 inch rack mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Horizon II mini indoor cabinet using oor mount . . . . .
Recommended bolt length for oor mounting . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mounting procedure for the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended bolt length and type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembling and installing the wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack mounting the Horizon II mini. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended bolt type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the adaptor frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Horizon II mini cabinet into the adaptor frame . . .
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections to RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of RF connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . .
Unused SMA connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF connector torque settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF connection principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suggested RF congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguration for omni 1 or 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguration for omni 2 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguration for omni 2 or 4 with bow tie . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguration for sector 1/1 or 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguration for two cabinet, sector 2/2 or 4/4 . . . . . . . . .
Conguration for two cabinet, sector 1/1/1 or 2/2/2 . . . . . . .
Conguration for three cabinet, sector 2/2/2 or 4/4/4 . . . . . .
Back panel cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector pinout tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External alarms connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIX inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB/BIM interconnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T43/CIM interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIU-NIU - E1 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIU to T43 (CIM)/BIB (BIM) mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of optical bers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting bers and connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning bers and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors for ber optic cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting ber optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre optic cables for expansion cabinets or enclosures . . . . .
Connecting ber optic cables between cabinet or enclosures . .
GPS connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS connector location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and connecting safety, power and earth cabling . . . . . .
Cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet earthing and ESP connection points. . . . . . . . . . .
Safety when installing power supply and earth cables . . . . . .
Power supply cable color coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+ 27 V DC cable connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-24
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-33
2-33
2-35
2-36
2-38
2-40
2-41
2-45
2-47
2-49
2-51
2-53
2-53
2-55
2-55
2-56
2-57
2-59
2-61
2-61
2-62
2-62
2-63
2-64
2-64
2-65
2-65
2-66
2-69
2-69
2-70
2-71
2-72
2-72
2-75
2-75
2-76
iii
Contents
- 48 to 60 V DC cable connection procedure . . . . . .

Cable connection procedure for AC . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Horizon II mini optional battery module . . .
Horizon II mini battery module installation procedure .
Connecting input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-connection checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety when installing power supply and earth cables .
Connecting DC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting AC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-77
2-79
2-81
2-84
2-85
2-85
2-85
2-86
2-87
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-19
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-27
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-37
3-40
3-45
3-45
3-48
3-61
3-69
3-71
3-75
3-75
3-75
Chapter 3: Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation

Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation overview . . . . . . .
Introduction to outdoor enclosure installation . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini installation sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure components . . . . . . . . .
E1 line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weather conditions affecting unpacking, installation or maintenance
Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure delivery and unpacking. . . . . .
Before unpacking the equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor enclosure packaging crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment package units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the crate, outdoor enclosure and plinth . . . . . . .
Safe disposal of packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor mounting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing outdoor enclosure on a oor mounting plinth . . . . . . .
View of plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended bolt length for concrete oor. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the oor mounting plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . . .
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . .
Recommended bolt length and type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembling and installing the wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View of outdoor enclosure interface plate . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the site earth to the outdoor enclosure . . . . . . .
Installing the Horizon II mini in the outdoor enclosure . . . . . . .
Disassembly of outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fit power distribution module (if required) . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical installation of the indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting earth cabling (indoor cabinet to outdoor enclosure) .
Connecting RF cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect power cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II mini cabinet DC connection procedure . . . . . . . .
Reassembly of outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preconnection checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety when installing power supply and earth cables . . . . . .
iv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connecting power . . . . . . . .
Installing the street furniture kit . .
Fitting the street furniture kit .
DC outdoor mini upgrade procedure .
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-76
3-77
3-79
3-80
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-12
4-12
4-13
Chapter 4: Horizon II mini interoperability

Introduction to interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixed product sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Architectural constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS architecture and inter-operability . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-operability - Points to consider . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizon II BTS, Horizon macro and MCell6 architecture.
Example mixed site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware equivalents for different BTS types . . . . . .
Further conguration information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special hardware for mixed cabinet congurations . . .
Chapter 5: Commissioning the Horizon II mini

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-9
5-11
5-13
5-15
Introduction to Horizon II BTS verication procedures . . . .

CINDY commissioning tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site verication test equipment, leads and plugs . . . . . . .
Test equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test leads required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTU2 VSWR and cell site offset information . . . . . . . . . .
VSWR checks on Horizon II micro . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for output power calibration and VSWR check
Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration .
Automatic VSWR test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual VSWR test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx output power calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Tx enclosure channel numbers and frequencies . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-10
6-10
6-14
6-14
6-17
6-20
6-26
Commissioning overview and test equipment . .

Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test leads required. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment and test lead calibration. . .
Pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety during commissioning . . . . . . . .
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request for power supply connection . . . .
Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . .
System insulation check for ac power . . . .
Powering up the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power up procedure without code load . . .
Power up procedure with code load . . . . .
Views of cabinet and MCBM . . . . . . . .
Sample form 1: Request for connection . . . . .
Sample form 2: Completion and Inspection form
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 6: Site verication procedures
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Contents
Checking the database equipage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test procedures for checking the database equipage . . .
Checking the backhaul link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test procedures for checking the backhaul link . . . . . .
Checking PIX connections and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test procedures for checking PIX connections and alarms .
Site restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site restoration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-30
6-30
6-30
6-30
6-33
6-33
6-33
6-34
6-36
6-36
6-36
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
Chapter 7: Decommissioning the Horizon II mini

Introduction to decommissioning the Horizon II mini
Decommissioning using the checklist . . . . . .
Initial decommissioning checks . . . . . . . . .
Powering down the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . .
Caring for the environment . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning equipment to Motorola . . . . . . . .
Decommissioning a Horizon II mini . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting cabinet cables . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a oor mounted cabinet . . . . . . . .
Removing a wall mounted cabinet . . . . . . . .
Removing a cabinet from 19 inch racking . . . .
Removing a cabinet from an outdoor enclosure .
Removing a oor mounted outdoor enclosure . .
Removing a wall mounted outdoor enclosure . .
vi
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
List
of
Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Horizon II mini indoor cabinet (right) and outdoor enclosure . . . .
Figure 1-2: Horizon II mini indoor cabinet site layout plan . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-3: Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure site layout plan. . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-4: Typical site earthing plan for open eld site . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-5: Earth electrode test set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-6: Typical concrete foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-1: Front and rear views of indoor cabinet with components identied
removed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-2: Typical shipping crate detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-3: Floor mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-4: Indoor wall mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-5: 19 inch rack adaptor frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-6: Floor mounting brackets with drilling dimensions . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-7: Attaching the oor mounting brackets to the indoor cabinet . . . .
Figure 2-8: Wall mounted Horizon II mini indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-9: Assembling the indoor wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-10: Fitting Horizon II mini indoor cabinet to indoor wall mount . . . .
Figure 2-11: Fitting Horizon II mini into the 19 inch rack adaptor frame . . . .
Figure 2-12: Location of RF components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-13: CTU2 to DUP RF Tx path options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-14: Single cabinet, omni 1 or 2 with DUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-15: Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with DUP and air combining . . . . . .
Figure 2-16: Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with two DUP and CMB in bow tie . . .
Figure 2-17: Functional diagram of Bow tie conguration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-18: Single cabinet, sector 1/1 or 2/2 with DUP . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-19: Two cabinet, sector 2/2 or 4/4 with DUP and air combining . . . .
Figure 2-20: Two cabinet, sector 1/1/1 or 2/2/2 with DUP . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-21: Three cabinet, sector 2/2/2 or 4/4/4 with DUP and air combining .
Figure 2-22: Back panel connector locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-23: BIB/BIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-24: T43/CIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-25: Fiber optic minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-26: Fiber optic connectors on the site expansion board . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-27: GPS connector on site expansion board . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-28: Cabinet earthing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-29: ESP connection point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-30: View of DC connector block and AC input recessed plug connector
Figure 2-31: Horizon II mini optional battery module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-32: Rear view of Horizon II mini, showing battery module well. . . . .
Figure 3-1: Fully equipped Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-2: Typical outdoor enclosure shipping crate detail . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-3: Floor mounting plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-4: Outdoor wall mounting bracket. (Cable cover not shown) . . . . . .
Figure 3-5: Position of anchor bolt holes in plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-6: Gasket protection bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
(doors
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-5
1-16
1-17
1-28
1-30
1-32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-4
2-8
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-17
2-19
2-20
2-22
2-24
2-28
2-31
2-34
2-38
2-40
2-42
2-44
2-45
2-47
2-49
2-51
2-54
2-58
2-59
2-63
2-68
2-69
2-73
2-74
2-79
2-82
2-83
3-4
3-10
3-14
3-15
3-17
3-20
vii
List of Figures
Figure 3-7: Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure positioned on the optional wall mount . . . . . .
Figure 3-8: Assembling the outdoor wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-9: Gasket protection bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-10: Outdoor enclosure interface plate viewed from below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-11: HMS control module connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-12: HMS unit latch operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-13: Power distribution module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-14: The outdoor enclosure DC distribution box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-15: Horizon II mini indoor cabinet inside the outdoor enclosure (AC version
shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-16: The two long S brackets and single short L bracket tted to the top and bottom of
the indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-17: View of the rear of the Horizon II mini inside of the outdoor enclosure. . . . . . .
Figure 3-18: Interface panel RF cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-19: Outdoor enclosure alarms connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-20: View of line interface module of Horizon II mini indoor cabinet in outdoor enclosure.
(Cables omitted for clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-21: BIB/BIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-22: T43/CIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-23: Fibre optic connectors on the site expansion board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-24: GPS connector on site expansion board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-25: Outdoor enclosure interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-26: Primary AC terminal block, (shown with terminal cover removed) . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-27: Earth connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-28: Power terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-29: Power distribution module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-30: The outdoor enclosure DC distribution box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-31: Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure with street furniture kit . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-32: HMS access panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-33: Fan control module connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-34: HMS unit latch operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-35: Primary AC terminal block (shown with terminal cover removed) . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-36: Earth connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-37: Power terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-38: DC HMS control connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-39: Previous label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-40: New label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-1: High level architecture of Horizon II BTS, Horizon macro and MCell6. . . . . . . .
Figure 4-2: Examples of interfacing different products at a single logical site . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-3: Example of alternative layouts for a mixed BTS site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-4: Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with two DUP and CMB in bow tie . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-5: Bow tie conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-6: Special cable gland plate required for mixed MCell6 and Horizon II BTS, or Horizon
macro installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-7: Location of the snap-in multi cable gland and mounting plate in the MCell6 . . . .
Figure 5-1: Horizon II 9-way to 9-way hardware verication cable connections . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5-2: Cabinet showing power up modules and detailed view of MCBM . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6-1: Horizon II 9-way to 9-way hardware verication cable connections . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6-2: Horizon II 9-way to 9-way CTU2 cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
3-23
3-25
3-28
3-31
3-35
3-36
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-43
3-44
3-46
3-51
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-58
3-59
3-64
3-69
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-73
3-78
3-80
3-81
3-82
3-83
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-87
3-88
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-9
4-11
4-13
4-14
5-3
5-12
6-4
6-5
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
List
of
Tables
List of Tables
Table 1-1: Horizon II mini tool list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-2: Pre-installation sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-3: Horizon II mini specication compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-4: Cabinet and outdoor enclosure dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-5: Horizon II mini cabinet weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-6: Torque values for all cabinet screws/bolts and RF connectors . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-7: Environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-8: Horizon II mini external power supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-9: Horizon II mini power consumption details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-10: Battery backup duration for typical power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-11: CTU2 RF power output, installed in Horizon II mini cabinet with no external
combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-12: Rx sensitivity performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-13: Horizon II mini frequency band characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-1: Installation sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-2: RF module connectors and destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-3: Mini-SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-4: Torque values for all RF connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-5: Single cabinet, omni 1 or 2 with DUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-6: Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with DUP and air combining . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-7: Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with two DUP and CMB in bow tie . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-8: Single cabinet, sector 1/1 or 2/2 with DUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-9: Two cabinet, sector 2/2 or 4/4 with DUP and air combining. . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-10: Two cabinet, sector 1/1/1 or 2/2/2 with DUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-11: Three cabinet, sector 2/2/2 or 4/4/4 with DUP and air combining . . . . . . .
Table 2-12: External alarms pin shorts (37-way D-type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-13: PIX pin connections (37-way D-type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-14: BIB/BIM interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-15: T43/CIM interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-16: MSI 0 to T43 (CIM) and BIB (BIM) mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-17: MSI 1 to T43 (CIM) and BIB (BIM) mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-18: Horizon II macro and Horizon II mini expansion cabinet bre optic cable pairs
Table 2-19: Horizon II micro expansion enclosure ber optic cable pairs . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-20: GPS pin connections (15 way D-Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-1: Installation sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-2: Mini-SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-3: Torque values for all RF connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-4: External alarms pin connections (37-way D-type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-5: BIB/BIM interconnections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-6: T43/CIM interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-7: Expansion cabinet bre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-8: GPS pin connections (15 way D-Type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-9: PIX alarms pin connections (37-way D-type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-1: BTS compatibility for collocation at a single logical site . . . . . . . . . . . .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-6
1-8
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-18
1-18
1-19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-20
1-21
1-22
2-3
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-39
2-41
2-43
2-46
2-48
2-50
2-52
2-55
2-56
2-58
2-60
2-61
2-61
2-65
2-66
2-70
3-2
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-55
3-56
3-56
3-59
3-60
4-2
ix
List of Tables
Table 4-2: RF hardware equivalents for Horizon II mini, Horizon II macro,

MCell6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-1: Test equipment required for commissioning . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-2: BS7671 (16th edition) Table 71A (part of). . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-1: Hardware verication test equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-2: PIX test plug pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-3: Tx output power during tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-4: VSWR and power calibration commands. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-5: VSWR and power calibration site restoration commands. . . . .
Horizon macro
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
and
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
4-12
5-2
5-6
6-3
6-6
6-8
6-9
6-36
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
About
This
Manual
Installation and Conguration: Horizon II

mini
What is covered in this manual?

This manual contains all the information required to install the Horizon II mini BTS. The
objectives of this manual are to help the reader:
Understand the pre-installation site requirements and be aware of site safety.
Carry out all the necessary indoor cabinet installation procedures.
Carry out all the necessary outdoor enclosure installation procedures.
Understand how to connect the Horizon II mini to previous generation Motorola equipment.
Commission the Horizon II mini.
Test and verify the installed Horizon II mini hardware equipment.
Decommission the Horizon II mini.
Related information
Refer to Service Manual, Horizon II mini (68P02903W21) for a technical description

and maintenance information for this equipment.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Revision history
Revision history
The following sections show the revision status of this document.
Version information
The following table lists the supported versions of this manual in order of issue:
Manual Issue
Date of Issue
Remarks
Sep 2003
Original Issue.
Sep 2004
Updated to include PGSM duplexer hardware.
Aug 2007
Final
Dec 2007
Final
Resolution of service requests

The following Service Requests are resolved in this document
Service Request
CMBP Number
Remarks
Incorporation of Change Notices

The following Change Notices (CN) are incorporated in this document:
CN date
CN number
Remarks
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
General information
General information
Purpose
Motorola documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation,
and maintenance of the Motorola equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all
personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.
Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or expressed, for any risk of damage, loss or
reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer,
or anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters,
or recommendations made in this document.
These documents are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by
Motorola. They can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such
training.
If this document was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it is not
updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it
was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software
release, then Motorola automatically supplies corrections and posts on the Motorola
customer website.
Cross references
References made to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references,
emphasized in blue text in electronic versions, are active links to the references.
This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are
not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of
contents.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Text conventions
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola documents to represent keyboard input
text, screen output text, and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this sentence.
Items of interest within a command appear like this sentence.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental
variables that appear on the screen are shown like this sentence.
Items of interest within a screen display appear like this sentence.
Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:
CTRL-c or CTRL+C
Press the Ctrl and C keys at the same time.
CTRL-SHIFT-c or
CTRL+SHIFT+C
Press the Ctrl, Shift, and C keys at the same time.
ALT-f or ALT+F
Press the Alt and F keys at the same time.
ALT+SHIFT+F11
Press the Alt, Shift and F11 keys at the same time.
Press the pipe symbol key.
RETURN or ENTER
Press the Return or Enter key.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Contacting Motorola
Contacting Motorola
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our documents.
24hour support
If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, contact the Customer Network
Resolution Center (CNRC) for immediate assistance. The 24hour telephone numbers are listed
at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer Network Resolution Center
contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact
the Local Motorola Ofce.
Questions and comments

Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email address:
mydocs@motorola.com.
Errors
To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network Resolution Center) and
provide the following information to enable CNRC to open an SR (Service Request):
The document type
The document title, part number, and revision character
The page number with the error
A detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Security advice
Security advice
Motorola systems and equipment provide security parameters that the operator congures
based on their particular operating environment. Motorola recommends setting and using
these parameters following industry recognized security practices. Consider protecting the
condentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the ability
to communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about
the parties involved.
In certain instances, Motorola makes specic recommendations regarding security practices.
The implementation of these recommendations and nal responsibility for the security of the
system lies with the operator of the system.
Contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24hour
telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information, from the menu located to the left of the
Login box. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local
Motorola Ofce.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Warnings, cautions, and notes
Warnings, cautions, and notes
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all
documents of this Motorola document set.
Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are
used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A
warning has the following format:
Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.
Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems,
software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents
no danger to personnel. A caution has the following format:
Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.
Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional
information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format:
Note text.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Safety
Safety
General safety
The following general safety guidelines apply to Motorola equipment:
The power jack and mating plug of the power cable must meet International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations 68P81150E62.
Power down or unplug the equipment before servicing.
Using non-Motorola parts for repair could damage the equipment or void warranty.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair instructions.
Portions of Motorola equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge.

Use precautions to prevent damage.
Electromagnetic energy
Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure
to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general

public to electromagnetic elds (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national
regulations.
Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on
the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the
risks arising from physical agents (electromagnetic elds) (18th individual Directive within
the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC).
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Caring for the environment
The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of
Motorola supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging.
Contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24hour
telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access
to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local Motorola Ofce.
In EU countries
The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European
Union (EU) directives and any amendments to these directives when using Motorola equipment
in EU countries.
Disposal of Motorola equipment

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Do not dispose of Motorola equipment in landll sites. In the EU, Motorola in conjunction
with a recycling partner ensures that equipment is collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.
Disposal of surplus packaging

European Parliament and Council Directive 94/62/EC Packaging and Packaging Waste
Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landll sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipients
responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.
In non-EU countries
In non-EU countries, dispose of Motorola equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance
with national and regional regulations.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
CMM labeling and disclosure table
CMM labeling and disclosure table
The Peoples Republic of China requires that our products comply with China Management
Methods (CMM) environmental regulations. (China Management Methods refers to the
regulation Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products.)
Two items are used to demonstrate compliance; the label and the disclosure table.
The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product.
Logo 1 means the product contains no substances in excess of the maximum concentration
value for materials identied in the China Management Methods regulation.
Logo 2 means that the product may contain substances in excess of the maximum
concentration value for materials identied in the China Management Methods regulation,
and has an Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) in years. The example shown
uses 50 years.
Logo 1
Logo 2
The Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is the period (in years) during which the Toxic
and Hazardous Substances (T&HS) contained in the Electronic Information Product (EIP)
will not leak or mutate causing environmental pollution or bodily injury from the use of the
EIP. The EFUP indicated by the Logo 2 label applies to a product and all its parts. Certain
eld-replaceable parts, such as battery modules, can have a different EFUP and are marked
separately.
The Disclosure table is intended only to communicate compliance with China requirements.
It is not intended to communicate compliance with EU RoHS or any other environmental
requirements.
10
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Motorola document set
Motorola document set
The Motorola document sets provide the information to operate, install, and maintain the
Motorola equipment.
Ordering documents and CD-ROMs

With internet access available, to view, download, or order documents (original or revised), visit
the Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com, or
contact your Motorola account representative.
Without internet access available, order hard-copy documents or CD-ROMs from your Motorola
Local Ofce or Representative.
If Motorola changes the content of a document after the original printing date, Motorola
publishes a new version with the same part number but a different revision character.
Document banner denitions

A banner indicates that some information contained in the document is not yet approved for
general customer use. A banner is oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,
PRELIMINARY UNDER DEVELOPMENT.
Data encryption
In order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the
network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements of particular
countries, this encryption occurs at different levels. The encryption may be individually
standardized or may not be present at all in some parts of the network in which it is normally
implemented. The document set covers encryption as if fully implemented. Limitations on the
encryption included in the particular software being delivered, are covered in the Release Notes
that accompany the individual software release.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
11
Data encryption
12
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Chapter
1
Introduction to Horizon II mini
This chapter provides a summary of the equipment, to enable readers to understand terminology
and thus locate information through the Table of Contents and Index.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
1-1
Finding information in this manual
Finding information in this manual
The following are provided to enable readers to nd the information in this manual.
A full Table of Contents (TOC) is provided at the front of this manual.
Headings are designed to convey contents accurately, to simplify searching for specic
information.
The Index at the back of the manual provides an alternative method of nding sub-sections
of information.
The rst chapter provides a summary of the equipment, to enable readers to understand
terminology and thus locate information through the Table of Contents and Index.
The information in each chapter is grouped according to functionality.
In this manual where CTU2 is mentioned, if CTU2Ds are installed, please read as
CTU2D. If a section of the manual is specically dealing with CTU2s or CTU2Ds, it is
highlighted at the beginning of the section.
1-2
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Manual scope
Manual scope
This manual covers installation and commissioning for the Horizon II mini cabinet. It is arranged
in the following chapters:
Chapter 1 Introduction to Horizon II mini
Chapter 1 Introduction to Horizon II mini describes briey about the tools required to install
the equipment.
It also explains about:

General information.
Safety instructions.
Specications.
Information about tools.
Describes the procedures to be followed for Initially preparing the site and Installing
the necessary ducting and plinth.
Chapter 2 Horizon II mini cabinet indoor installation

Chapter 2 Horizon II mini cabinet indoor installation describes the following.
Installation procedures for the Horizon II cabinet at an indoor location.
An overview of the different congurations available.
Chapter 3 Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation

Chapter 3 Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation describes the following.
Installing the outdoor enclosure and the Horizon II mini cabinet.
An overview of the different congurations available.
Chapter 4 Horizon II mini inter-operability

Chapter 4 Horizon II mini interoperability describes inter-operability between the Horizon II
mini BTS with earlier Motorola BTS equipment.
Chapter 5 Commissioning the Horizon II mini
Chapter 5 Commissioning the Horizon II mini describes all procedures necessary to enable
the Horizon II mini to be fully operational.
Chapter 6 Site Verication procedures.
Chapter 6 Site verication procedures describes procedures necessary to enable the cabinet to
be fully operational.
68P02903W22-D
1-3
Dec 2007
Safety instructions
Chapter 7 Decommissioning the Horizon II mini

Chapter 7 Decommissioning the Horizon II mini describes all procedures necessary to
decommission the Horizon II mini.
Safety instructions
This equipment must be installed only by trained personnel.

The following safety instructions must be observed when installing the equipment described
in this manual:
1-4
The installation and conguration procedures described in this manual must only be
carried out by suitably trained personnel.
Installation and commissioning must comply with all relevant national and regional
regulations.
The equipment must only be installed in a location to which unauthorized access can be
prevented, unless the optional, tamper resistant, shrouds are tted.
Indoor cabinets must be rack mounted, or bolted to either the oor or to a properly
installed wall mounting bracket.
An outdoor enclosure must be bolted to either: the plinth base, which must be bolted to
the oor; or to a properly installed wall mounting bracket.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Introduction and site preparation
Introduction and site preparation
This chapter introduces and describes the following:
Structure of the manual.
The initial preparation of the site.
Figure 1-1 Horizon II mini indoor cabinet (right) and outdoor enclosure
68P02903W22-D
1-5
Dec 2007
Tool list for Horizon II mini
Table 1-1 lists the recommended tools required for installing and commissioning the Horizon II
mini BTS.
Table 1-1
Horizon II mini tool list

Description
Quantity
1
1 pair
1.5 m wooden step ladder.

150 mm heavy-duty side cutters.
150 mm side cutters.
250 mm half round le.
250 mm vice grips.
280 mm insulated adjustable spanner.
300 mm hacksaw.
300 mm steel rule.
50 mm crimp tool.
6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet).
6 mm torque spanner (for SMA DUP connectors).
7.5 m tape measure.
8 mm Hex bit.
Antistatic mat.
Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead.
BNC crimp tool with inserts.
1 pair
Cable shears.
Cable tie gun.
Centre punch.
Claw hammer.
Coax cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable).
Combination spanners A/F: 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 7/16, 1/2, 9/16, 5/8, 11/16,
7/8, 3/4, 1.
1 each
Combination spanners metric: 8 mm to 25 mm.
Crimp tool for T43 connectors.
Drill bit set.
Dust mask.
1 pair
Ear defenders.
1 pair
Flush cut wire cutters.

Continued
1-6
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Table 1-1 Horizon II mini tool list (Continued)

Description
Quantity
1 pair
General purpose pliers.
1 pair
GP serrated jaw pliers.
Hand crimp tool.
Hard hat.
1 pair
1
Isolating transformer (suitable for site use).
Junior hacksaw.
Knife with retractable blade.
1 pair
Light duty cable cutters.
M20 drill bit.
Marker pen.
Null modem.
Pipe cutter.
Piston drill.
Pocket scriber.
Ratchet ring spanner (15 mm X 13 mm).
RS 232 mini tester.
1 pair
Safety goggles.
Screwdriver set (Including at and cross-head blades).
Security hexagon key set.
Set of jeweller's screwdrivers.
1 pair
Snipe nose pliers.
Socket set (A/F/Metric 13 mm or 1/2 sq drive).
Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder.
SouthCo trilobe security fastener bit.
Spirit level (1 m).
1 pair
68P02903W22-D
Industrial scissors.
Straight point tweezers.
Table vice.
Telephone plug crimp tool.
Torch.
Torque spanner (12 mm).
Torque wrench (1-25 Nm).
Torx driver set (T10 to T30) and Security Torx driver set (T10 to T30).
1-7
Dec 2007
Preparation overview
Preparation overview
Overview of site preparation

This section provides a general overview of site preparation.
Information that should be read for initial planning.
Information that should be read for safe completion of procedures.
Pre-installation procedures to be followed to prepare the site before beginning the

installation.
Pre-installation procedures
Pre-installation for the cabinet comprises the sections listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2
Pre-installation sections
Section
1-8
Description
Site requirements on
page 1-9.
Describes mechanical, electrical and structural

parameters to be taken into account when
selecting a site.
Introduction to Horizon
II mini specications on
page 1-10.
Details mechanical, electrical and structural

specications.
Visiting the site on page

1-23.
Describes the procedures to be followed when

visiting the site.
Preparing the site on

page 1-26.
Describes the general site preparation

procedures.
Earthing an outdoor site

on page 1-27.
Describes earthing techniques for outdoor

sites.
Preparing outdoor
foundations on page
1-31.
Describes the procedures for laying outdoor

enclosure foundations.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Site requirements
Site requirements
Overview of requirements
The base site area where the equipment is to be installed must meet the following requirements:
Structural requirements including:

Space for all conditions, including maintenance, expansion and associated cabling.
Allowance for cabinet or outdoor enclosure height.
Allowance for weight, including that for potential additions on expansion.
68P02903W22-D
Environmental limits on page 1-13 and Power requirements on page 1-18 as dened in this
section of the manual, and as required by local or national regulations.
1-9
Dec 2007
All Horizon II mini specications are included in the following sections:
Introduction to specications.
Physical specications.
Electrical and RF specications.
Approval and safety

Table 1-3 lists the principal specications with which the Horizon II mini complies, in accordance
with European Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment Directive 99\5\EC.
Table 1-3 Horizon II mini specication compliance

Specication type
Specication number
Type approval
ETSI EN301 502
EMC
ETSI EN301 489-8
Safety
EN 60215, IEC 60215, IEC 60950 (including

national deviations), EN 60950
Software requirements
All Horizon II mini BTSs require software release GSR6 (Horizon II) or later in the network.
The PGSM duplexer requires software release GSR6 (Horizon II) 1670.25 or GSR7 1760.0a
in the network.
Access control requirements

Unauthorized access to the Horizon II mini equipment must be prevented. The Horizon II mini
indoor cabinet must be installed only in a location where access by unauthorized personnel
can be prevented. Similarly, the outdoor enclosure must be installed only in a location where
access by unauthorized personnel can be prevented, unless the optional, tamper resistant,
'street furniture' is tted.
1-10
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Horizon II mini physical specications
Horizon II mini physical specications
This section describes the following physical specications:
Physical dimensions.
Weights.
Torque values.
Structural considerations of the Horizon II mini indoor base station cabinet.
Associated outdoor enclosure.
The section also provides a simple site layout plan to help visualize the site dimensions.
Cabinet and outdoor enclosure dimensions

Table 1-4 shows the cabinet dimensions.
Table 1-4 Cabinet and outdoor enclosure dimensions

Cabinet type
Height
Width
Depth
Indoor cabinet
(including oor
brackets)
700 mm
500 mm
198 mm
(278 mm)
Indoor wall
mounting
bracket
(assembled)
787 mm
483.5 mm
237 mm
19 inch rack
mount
855 mm (20 U)
485 mm (19 in)
500 mm
850 mm
675 mm
449 mm
Outdoor wall
plinth
48 mm
679 mm
449 mm
Outdoor wall
mounting
bracket (with
plinth)
889 mm
675 mm
485.5 mm
Outdoor
enclosure
Continued
68P02903W22-D
1-11
Dec 2007
Weights
Table 1-4 Cabinet and outdoor enclosure dimensions (Continued)

Height
Width
Depth
156 mm
679 mm
469 mm
1000 mm
700 mm
542 mm
Cabinet type
Outdoor oor
plinth
Outdoor oor
mounted (with
street furniture)
Weights
Table 1-5 shows the maximum cabinet and enclosure weights.
Consider future expansion. Additional cabinets may be added to the site. Ensure that
the oor is capable of supporting the total weight.
Table 1-5 Horizon II mini cabinet weights

Item
Indoor cabinet (empty)
14 kg
Indoor cabinet (fully

populated excluding
battery unit)
40 kg
Battery unit
1-12
Weight
5 kg
Outdoor enclosure (empty)
27 kg
HMS unit
20 kg
Outdoor enclosure (fully

populated)
95 kg
Indoor wall mounting

bracket
3.9 kg
Outdoor wall mounting

bracket
11 kg
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Torque values
Torque values
Table 1-6 details torque values used during installation, maintenance and repair procedures.
Table 1-6 Torque values for all cabinet screws/bolts and RF connectors
Size of
screw/bolt
Torque value
M4
M6
M8
M10
SMA
N-Type
7/16
2.2
Nm
3.4
Nm
5 Nm
10 Nm
1 Nm
3.4
Nm
25
Nm
Torque values used with M12 anchor bolts depends on the anchor bolt manufacturer.
Check manufacturer's data for correct values.
Environmental limits
Table 1-7 lists the environmental limits for Horizon II mini operation and storage.
Table 1-7 Environmental limits

Environment
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Operating
Indoor
-5 C to + 45 C
Outdoor
-40 C to + 50
C
5% to 100% relative
humidity, not to
exceed 29 gwater/m3
air.
Storage
-45 C to +70 C
8% to 100% relative
humidity, not to
exceed 30 gwater/m3
air.
This specication is valid up to an altitude of 3 kms, corresponding to an atmospheric

pressure range of 648 millibars to 1048 millibars.
68P02903W22-D
1-13
Dec 2007
Structural considerations
Structural considerations
The site structure must be designed to meet accepted cellular system specications, and
Horizon II mini physical, electrical and RF specications. Additional indoor and outdoor
considerations are described below.
The foundation or structure on which the BTS cabinet or enclosure is mounted must be of
sufcient strength to support the maximum gross weight of the equipment, as dened in
Table 1-5.
In seismologically active areas, Motorola suggests using a qualied structural engineer

to assess frame mounting requirements, such as oor construction, mounting anchors,
cell site construction and to provide a suitable design for earthquake proong, if
required.
Indoor cabinet
Adequate clearance must be provided at the front and back of the indoor cabinet for operation
and maintenance purposes. Additionally, the cabinet must be installed in an area where
unauthorized access to the equipment can be prevented.
The indoor cabinet main ventilation entry is from both sides of the cabinet above the power
supply unit, with the exhaust at the top and upper sides. The power supply has a separate
ventilation path, with air entry at the bottom front of the cabinet and exhaust at the bottom rear.
The wall mounting brackets allow an indoor cabinet to be mounted to a wall, and provides
correct clearance at the rear and top for ventilation. However, if the unit is oor mounted it
must be placed at least 40 mm away from obstructions, such as wall or other cabinets, to
ensure adequate ventilation.
Outdoor enclosure
Adequate clearance must be provided at the front and both sides of the outdoor enclosure for
operation and maintenance purposes. Additionally, if installing in an area where access to
the equipment is not controlled, clearance for the optional, tamper resistant, street furniture
must be allowed.
Cable entry for the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure is from below, therefore appropriate
cable ducts must already be in place.
The outdoor enclosure ventilation air enters at the upper left and is expelled at the bottom left
on the external face of the HMS unit. The outdoor wall mounting brackets allow an outdoor
enclosure to be mounted to a wall, ventilation is ensured by the HMS unit facing away from the
wall.
In addition to supporting the equipment weight, the foundation or structure on which the
BTS cabinet or enclosure is mounted must be of sufcient strength to withstand 105 knot
(192 kmph) winds on the cabinet.
1-14
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Layout plan
Layout plan
The site layout must take into account not only the dimensions of the equipment but also
minimum clearances for correct operation, ventilation and maintenance purposes:
Figure 1-2 shows the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet installation layout plan.
Figure 1-3 shows the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation layout plan.
68P02903W22-D
1-15
Dec 2007
Layout plan
Figure 1-2 Horizon II mini indoor cabinet site layout plan
1-16
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 1-3
68P02903W22-D
Layout plan
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure site layout plan
1-17
Dec 2007
This section describes the power, radio frequency specications and backhaul connectivity
options of the Horizon II mini indoor BTS cabinet and the associated outdoor enclosure.
Power requirements
The power supply requirements and power consumption of the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
and outdoor enclosure are described below.
Cabinet power supply requirements

Table 1-8 lists the external power supply requirements for the different power supply options.
Table 1-8 Horizon II mini external power supply requirements

Voltage supply
range
Current supply
maximum
+20 V to +30 V DC
60 A to 40 A
Indoor: -48 V DC (positive earth)
-39 V to -72 V DC
31 A to 17 A
Indoor: 100 V to 240 V AC (45 to 65

Hz)
88 V to 264 V AC
14.2 A to 5.4 A
Outdoor 198 to 240 V AC (45 to 65

Hz)
176 V to 264 V AC
9.6 A to 7.6 A
Outdoor: -48 V DC
-40 V to -58 V DC
42.7 A to 36.1 A
Nominal Voltage
Indoor: +27 V DC (negative earth)
Power consumption
Table 1-9 lists typical and worst case power consumption values for example, Horizon II mini
congurations.
Table 1-9 Horizon II mini power consumption details

Example conguration
Indoor cabinet DC input
(+28 V or -48 V)
Power consumption (W)

Typical
Worst case
Micro Tx power
approximately 5 W
422
840
Macro Tx full power
723
1210
Continued
1-18
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Table 1-9
Battery backup
Horizon II mini power consumption details (Continued)

Example conguration
Indoor cabinet DC input

(-48V)
Outdoor enclosure DC
input (-48 V)
Outdoor enclosure AC
input (198 V to 240 V)
Power consumption (W)

Typical
Worst case
Micro Tx power
approximately 5 W
440
840
Macro Tx full power
800
1210
Micro Tx power
approximately 5 W
509
1498
Macro Tx full power
861
1862
Micro Tx power
approximately 5 W
530
1530
Macro Tx full power
900
1890
'Worst case' power consumption gures are theoretical values derived under extreme
conditions and are affected by variables such as temperature, component tolerances,
transmission power and supply voltage. Although these gures must be considered
when planning site power requirements, typical measured consumption values are
lower.
Battery backup
The Horizon II mini indoor cabinet can be tted with an optional battery unit to provide short
term battery backup (sufcient to send a Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) imminent alarm and
perform controlled shut down).
Table 1-10 lists the typical duration of the battery backup, with different transmit power options.
Table 1-10 Battery backup duration for typical power consumption

Output Tx power
Micro cell
(approximately 5
watts)
Full power
2 carriers
4 carriers
10 minutes
5 minutes
6 minutes
3 minutes
Worst case power consumption reduces battery backup

duration by approximately 50%.
68P02903W22-D
1-19
Dec 2007
RF power output
RF power output
Table 1-11 lists the RF power output of the CTU2 for the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency
bands in the various conguration options available.
The CTU2D maintains the same output power gures as CTU2, but with a -0/+2 dB
tolerance at mid-band in room temperature and -0/+2.5 dB tolerance applies for all
channels at extreme conditions.
Table 1-11 CTU2 RF power output, installed in Horizon II mini cabinet with no
external combining
Output power (+/-2 dB)
CTU2
conguration
Combining
GMSK
PGSM900
EGSM900
8PSK
DCS1800
PGSM900
Single density
No
60 W
external
combining
63 W
50 W
(48.0 dBm) (47.0 dBm)
19 W
Double density
No
19 W
external
combining
20 W
16 W
(43.0 dBm) (42.0 dBm)
N/A
EGSM900
DCS1800
20 W
16 W
(43.0 dBm) (42.0 dBm)
N/A
N/A
In Table 1-11 the RF output power is measured at the antenna port at the rear of the
cabinet.
1-20
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Sensitivity
Sensitivity
The receiver sensitivity performance of the equipment is shown in Table 1-12.
Table 1-12 Rx sensitivity performance

Conditions
PGSM900
EGSM900
GSM1800
Typical
Guaranteed
Typical
Guaranteed
Typical
Guaranteed
Static channel
-111.4
dBm
-109.8
dBm
-112.0
dBm
-110.5
dBm
-114.0
dBm
-111.5
dBm
Faded channel
-108.4
dBm
-106.8
dBm
-109.0
dBm
-107.5
dBm
-111.0
dBm
-108.5
dBm
Faded with
diversity
Up to
113.4
dBm
Up to
111.8
dBm
Up to
-114.0
dBm
Up to
-112.5
dBm
Up to
-116.0
dBm
Up to
-113.5
dBm
The description related to Table 1-12 is as given below:
GMSK performance for a nominal 2-2 conguration with a duplexer on the main receiver
branch.
Typical values are the average expected performance over the frequency band when
measured at the main branch BTS antenna port, that is, the duplexer antenna port.
There is approximately 0.5 dB degradation of performance over the frequency band

compared to mid-band. Mid-band performance is typically 0.5 dB more than the values
quoted above which are intended to cover the entire receive band.
Guaranteed values are the worst expected performance over the frequency band when
measured at the main branch BTS antenna port, that is, the duplexer antenna port.
Diversity performance (2 branch) is shown to be 5 dB more than non diversity, but the
exact gure is dependent on the BTS conguration, antenna spacing or orientation and
radio propagation environment.
All values cited assume the use of qualied and calibrated BTS BER test equipment.
All signal sources, faders, attenuators and RF cables are assumed to be accurately
calibrated in order to determine the true power level being applied to the BTS
antenna port.
68P02903W22-D
1-21
Dec 2007
Frequency capability
Frequency capability
The frequency capabilities of the Horizon II mini are described in this section.
Frequency hopping
The Horizon II mini supports Baseband Frequency Hopping (BBH) and Synthesizer Frequency
Hopping (SFH).
Frequency band characteristics

BTS radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with the characteristics
listed in the table Table 1-13.
Table 1-13 Horizon II mini frequency band characteristics

Frequency band
PGSM900
EGSM
GSM1800
Transmit frequency
band (MHz)
935 to 960
925 to 960
1805 to 1880
Receive frequency band

(MHz)
890 to 915
880 to 915
1710 to 1785
45
45
95
Channel width (kHz)
200
200
200
Number of channels
124
174
374
Transmit frequency
guard bands (MHz)
935.0 to 935.1
925.0 to 925.1
1805.0 to 1805.1
959.9 to 960.0
959.9 to 960.0
1879.9 to 1880.0
Receive frequency
guard bands (MHz)
890.0 to 890.1
880.0 to 880.1
1710.0 to 1710.1
914.9 to 915.0
914.9 to 915.0
1784.9 to 1785.0
Transmit channel
centre frequency (MHz)
Even 10 ths
of a MHz
from 935.2 to
959.8 (200 kHz
spacing)
Even 10 ths
of a MHz
from 925.2 to
959.8 (200 kHz
spacing)
Even 10 ths of a
MHz from 1805.2
to 1879.8 (200 kHz
spacing)
Receive channel centre

frequency (MHz)
Even 10 ths
of a MHz
from 890.2 to
914.8 (200 kHz
spacing)
Even 10 ths
of a MHz
from 880.2 to
914.8 (200 kHz
spacing)
Even 10 ths of a
MHz from 1710.2
to 1784.8 (200 kHz
spacing)
Transmit/receive
duplex separation
(MHz)
BSC connectivity options

Only E1 connection is currently supported.
1-22
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Visiting the site
Visiting the site
When preparing to do work at a site and upon arrival, follow the guidelines provided in this
section.
Before leaving for the site

Before leaving for the site, follow Procedure 1-1.
Procedure 1-1 Initial preparation for site visit

1
Ensure that team members have adequate test equipment, tools, and necessary
hardware to complete the tasks. Check for any special requirements.
Contact the person in charge of the site to advise of the team's estimated time
of arrival and the expected duration of their stay on the site. Usually the
logistics will have already been arranged, but it is good practice to check that
the information was received.
Ensure that the team read the site access details on each visit to a site as local
regulations may change.
Arrival at site
When entering any site, follow Procedure 1-2.
Procedure 1-2 Site entry procedure

1
68P02903W22-D
Contact the communications site manager before entering the site. Obtain the
following information from the on-site contact:
Local regulations.
Parking instructions.
Waste material removal or disposal instructions.
Directions to canteen facilities (if available).
Enter the site.
Check for building alarms, for example, intruder alarms, that may have been
activated by entry. If tted, disable the re extinguishing systems, and any
alarms activated by entry.
Read any local instructions provided.
1-23
Dec 2007
Leaving site
Leaving site
When leaving a site, follow Procedure 1-3.
Procedure 1-3 Site exit procedure

1
Enable the re extinguishing system, if tted, and any alarms that were disabled.
Contact the local site manager to announce the team's departure.
Sign out of the building as necessary.
Waste material on site

Clear waste material from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicated by the
customer.
Do not burn waste material, as packaging might give off toxic gasses.
Rural sites
It is the responsibility of the senior member of the team to ensure that all personnel on site are
aware of all applicable national and regional environmental regulations or codes of practice
and, especially with respect to water authority sites, any relevant health regulations.
Adhere to these points:
1-24
Guard against all risk of re.
Fasten all gates (remember, site visits could be traced back if a complaint is made).
Leave no litter.
Drive carefully on country roads and observe speed restrictions at all times.
Keep to the paths and tracks if crossing farm land.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
On site safety
On site safety
The following safety guidelines are applicable to all members of the installation/maintenance
team and any visitors to the site.
All personnel must:
Ensure that no-one moves heavy items without assistance. Equipment must be safely
positioned at all times.
Wear safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is in progress, and when local
regulations require them.
Wear safety goggles and dust masks when drilling. This is particularly important when
drilling overhead ironwork.
Wear ear protectors while drilling is in progress.
Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.
Stop any work if anyone in the team is not properly protected, or is unaware of safety
requirements.
When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. This is to prevent
sharp edges inicting injury when not cut ush with the locking edge.
68P02903W22-D
1-25
Dec 2007
Preparing the site
Preparing the site
This section provides a general overview on the preparation of a site, and site requirements. For
specic sites, refer to the site-specic documentation.
Base site structure

The base site structure should be designed to meet accepted cellular system specications.
Additionally, the site must meet the environmental and electrical operating criteria.
Site owner provision

The site owner should provide secure access free from unauthorized personnel, ample
protection from re, and adequate lighting and clearance at the front and rear of the equipment
for operation and maintenance. Additionally, power supply cables, earth cables, antennas,
RF cables, and any necessary cable ducts (with sufcient space for communications cables),
should be provided.
Site access
The site access road and equipment receiving area must be constructed of asphalt, concrete, or
other suitable load bearing aggregate capable of supporting the transportation vehicle and the
equipment. The area available, and the overhead clearance, must allow access by the delivery
vehicles, and must allow their departure after unloading.
Ensure that the unloading area is clear of standing water, fallen leaves, mud and
building debris.
Site installation layout

The site installation layout plans are provided in the BTS specications section of this chapter.
The gure included in that section shows the enclosure installation layout plan with dimensions.
1-26
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
This section provides information on suggested earthing procedures for an outdoor site. The
following terminology is used throughout the manual when describing earthing (grounding)
requirements.
SITE earth The site earth comprises the tower, building and lightning protection earth
systems. The site earth is normally provided by the civil engineers preparing the site and
typically makes use of earth rods, plates and constructional steelwork. All metalwork at
the site, including fences, pipework, cable trays and the BTS cabinets are bonded to the
site earth system.
PROTECTIVE earth This is also referred to as SAFETY earth, is required to ensure the
electrical safety of the system. This is generally provided and certied by the electrical
utility company. It is bonded to the site earth system, and is made available to the user as
an earth connection on the ac supply lead.
Before installing power supply and earth cables the following warnings should be
observed:
To ensure a complete primary earth path, the earth cable must be connected to
the Horizon II micro enclosure before connection of the power supply cable to
the main power source.
Power supply and earth cable ratings must be selected in accordance with
national and regional wiring regulations.
The enclosure earth cable must be equal to or larger than the power supply
cables.
Horizon II micro equipment operates from potentially hazardous voltages. Only

competent persons, (in accordance with local regulations) may work on this
equipment.
It is imperative that only suitably trained skilled personnel be allowed to install

and commission this equipment, or remove the protective covers for any purpose.
The separate earth systems must be isolated from each other to facilitate periodic testing of the
earth systems. Earth inspection pits are provided for this purpose.
68P02903W22-D
1-27
Dec 2007
Earthing requirements
Earthing requirements
Each site external earth must be assessed on an individual site basis, as conditions will vary
considerably depending on local soil conditions and site topography. It is essential that a site
survey and soil resistance test be performed before installation. The site architect denes the
site and foundation earthing requirements. The earthing resistance between earth electrodes
must be less than 10 ohms, using a measurement method described in Earth electrode testing
on page 1-29.
A typical site earthing plan is shown in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4
Typical site earthing plan for open eld site
Earth electrode system

The earth electrode system consists of a series of interconnected earth electrodes (minimum of
four) that are located outside the foundation reinforcing metalwork. Refer to Figure 1-4 for
details. The earth rods should be connected together using TCO30 solid tape conductors,
avoiding any sharp bends; a minimum bend radius of 250 mm is recommended.
1-28
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Cross bonding
Cross bonding
Foundation metalwork must be connected to the earth electrode network. The earth system
must also be cross-bonded to an adjacent antenna mast, with two connections made between
the two systems. All earth cable terminations must be crimped, clamped or welded; soldered
joints are not permitted.
Earthing procedure
Unless a fully tested earth scheme has already been provided at the site, the equipment must be
earthed as detailed in this procedure. Make provision for routing the earth cables into the site
and to the installation location before beginning installation of the equipment.
Excavate the site to accommodate the foundation to a depth determined by the site architect.
For the earth components to be used, refer to Figure 1-4 and proceed as follows:
Procedure 1-4 Site earthing

1
Drive a minimum of four copper earth rods 2.4 m long below the surface, and
connect these rods together with 70 mm Cross Sectional Area (CSA) solid
conductor.
Connect the earth rods to the cabinet earth bar using a 70 mm CSA solid
conductor.
Check that the earth electrode installation resistance is less than 10 ohms. If
the resistance is greater than 10 ohms, install more earth rods to bring the
resistance within specication.
Cross-bond the earth system to the adjacent antenna mast earth with conductors
of 70 mm CSA, buried at a depth of not less than 500 mm.
Bond equipment such as metal fences, metal fuel tanks, metal buildings, or steel
building skids associated with the site to the closest earthing rod or bonding
wire.
Earth electrode testing

Three methods of earth electrode test (earth mat) are used and should be carried out as detailed
in BS7671 16th Edition (or equivalent national and regional regulations).
Fall of potential.
61.8% rule.
Slope method.
The method of test to be used at a specic site is determined by the site conditions, the extent of
the earth system and the limitations of the site boundaries. The method used at the site is to
be determined from the earth electrode compliancy certicate and repeated annually. Before
proceeding with the test, ensure that the resistance of the test leads is less than 0.05 ohms.
On completion of testing, complete and sign the earth electrode test documentation (Forms of
Completion and Inspection Certicate).
68P02903W22-D
1-29
Dec 2007
Earth electrode testing
Fall of potential This method applies when the three electrodes (earth, potential and
current) can be positioned in a straight line, the soil is homogenous and also when single
electrode systems are being used.
Drive the current test spike and potential spike into the ground as shown in Figure 1-5. Perform
the three resistance tests and check that the average of the three tests is less than 10 ohms.
61.8% rule This method of testing is used for measuring resistance of earth electrodes but
is only practical on single earth electrode systems.
Set up the test equipment as shown in Figure 1-5 with the potential spike placed at a distance of
61.8% of the distance from the earth electrode to the current test spike. A greater accuracy can
be achieved by increasing the number of readings.
Slope method This method applies to large earth systems. Refer to Figure 1-5, but insert
the potential spike at a number of points between the earth system and the current spike. A
minimum of six readings must be taken to plot a graph and this graph compared to published
tables to calculate the resistance.
Earth electrode test set-up

Figure 1-5 Earth electrode test set-up
1-30
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Preparing outdoor foundations
Preparing outdoor foundations
Floor mounted outdoor equipment must be installed on a concrete base of sufcient size
and strength to accommodate the equipment units and (if applicable), any optional ancillary
enclosures. Concrete base requirements to be determined by the structural engineer. Consider
future as well as present space requirements.
At the customer's discretion a steel structure may also be used, with size, construction
and layout determined by a civil engineer.
Foundation depth
Excavations exceeding 1.2 m in depth must be adequately shored to prevent land slip
or trench collapse. Excavated earth must NOT be placed within 1 m of the excavation
edge.
The foundation depth is determined by a soil survey performed by the site architect, but must be
of sufcient strength to withstand 105 knot winds on the equipment from all sides and support
the maximum gross weight of all equipment installed.
Outdoor foundation
The cross-sectional diagram in Figure 1-6 shows a typical foundation for the outdoor equipment
or ancillary enclosures (bolts and anchors not to scale).
68P02903W22-D
1-31
Dec 2007
Constructing the foundation
Figure 1-6 Typical concrete foundation

Follow Procedure 1-5 to construct the foundation and refer Figure 1-6.
Procedure 1-5 Foundation construction

1
Excavate the foundation.
Do not place excavated earth within 1 m of the excavation edge.

2
Erect concrete shuttering to produce the required base.
Position any required cable ducts. Cable entry to the outdoor enclosure is
from below.
Continued
1-32
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 1-5 Foundation construction (Continued)

4
Make the foundation from 20 mm mix concrete with the cable ducts (if
used) mounted in position. If required, locally thicken the areas around
the foundation bolts.
Observe the following points when nishing the concrete base:
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Ensure that the concrete is laid to give a water run off with
tapered edges. Where a eld site, other than an already
permanent hard standing, is laid, the foundation must have
a bevelled nish.
To avoid over-stressing the equipment, use a spirit level or

surveyors level to check that the concrete base surface is
level to 3 mm across diagonals.
1-33
1-34
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Chapter
2
Horizon II mini cabinet indoor installation
This chapter provides the information required to install Horizon II mini cabinets and the
internal and external interfaces.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
2-1
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet installation overview
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet installation overview
This section introduces the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet installation and lists the topics
covered in this chapter, it also covers E1 line testing and regulatory compliance.
Introduction to installation
Ensure that all site associated equipment is completely installed before commissioning
the cabinet for operation.
Some site equipment may not be produced by Motorola, including battery chargers,
power supplies, and antennas. Refer to Site-specic documentation and Non-Motorola
vendor instructions.
Before starting an installation, ensure that the site has been prepared according to
the description summarized in the Preparation overview section, and the Site-specic
documentation.
Floor mounted cabinets must be securely bolted to the oor.
2-2
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Installation sections
Cabinet installation comprises the sections listed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
Section
Description
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet delivery and

unpacking on page 2-6.
Information on delivery, packaging and how

to unpack the equipment.
Indoor mounting options on page 2-12.
Describes the mounting options for the

indoor cabinet.
Installing Horizon II mini indoor cabinet

using oor mount on page 2-16.
Provides instructions for mounting the

indoor cabinet on the oor.
Rack mounting the Horizon II mini on page

2-26.
Describes the procedure for mounting the

indoor cabinet in 19 inch racking.
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini indoor

cabinet on page 2-20.
Describes the procedure for wall mounting

the indoor cabinet.
Earthing and transient protection on page

2-29.
Details site earthing procedures and cabinet

internal earths.
Connections to RF modules on page 2-30.
Details setting up antenna connections, RF

module interconnections and RF connection
principles.
Suggested RF congurations on page 2-36.
Conguration information to illustrate

typical equipment connections.
Back panel cabling on page 2-53.
Details cabling to the back panel.
Connecting ber optic cables on page 2-65.
Describes connection and care of bre optic

cables.
GPS connection on page 2-69.
Details the optional GPS connection.
Installing and connecting safety, power and

earth cabling on page 2-71.
Details of power supply and earthing

requirements and power supply cabling
procedures.
Connecting input power on page 2-85.
Details the correct sequence for connection

to the external power source.
68P02903W22-D
2-3
Dec 2007
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet components
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet components

Figure 2-1 shows the main components of a fully equipped cabinet.
Figure 2-1 Front and rear views of indoor cabinet with components identied (doors
removed)
CTU2
DUP LEXER
HIISC
S ITE
EXPANS ION
BOARD
ALARMS
S HORTING
P LUG
ALARM
MODULE
AC IN
FAN
UNIT
DC IN
BATTERY
MODULE
MCBM
PCU
MINI
SUR F
T43/BIB
(or BIM/CIM)
MAIN
EARTH
ti-GSM-Horizon II mini W21-00002-eps-sw
2-4
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
E1 line testing
E1 line testing
If an E1 line has been provided, contact the local MSC and, at the earliest opportunity, arrange
to test the line back to the MSC.
Regulatory compliance
All work must be carried out in accordance with the national and regional regulations applicable
at the installation site. The following acts and regulations apply for the United Kingdom:
Health and safety at work act, 1974.
Electricity at work regulations, 1989.
IEE regulations 16th Editions BS7671 (or IEC 364).
Personal protective equipment at work regulations, 1992.
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) regulations.
Installation assumptions
All installation and commissioning procedures assume that they are being performed by
persons competent (In accordance with National, Regional and Local regulations) to install
and commission:
Electrical wiring installations, (AC and DC).
Horizon II mini equipment.
68P02903W22-D
2-5
Dec 2007
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet delivery and unpacking
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet delivery and unpacking
This section provides information on delivery, packaging and how to unpack the equipment.
Before unpacking the equipment

Before the cabinet equipment arrives, installation personnel should designate an area at the
site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should also be suitable for unpacking the
equipment. Consult with the heavy freight or moving company and the owners of the building
(if applicable) to select this area.
The cabinet equipment should be delivered to the site while still contained in its
packaging. This is to protect the cabinet from damage and moisture whilst in transit.
The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company, along with the
necessary moving dollies and padding. Use the dollies and padding to move the equipment from
the unloading area to the installation point.
Keep all paperwork that is attached to the packaging or found inside the cabinet.
Safety requirements
The safety requirements for unpacking and handling the Horizon II mini are outlined in this
section.
Observe the following safety precautions when handling Horizon II mini equipment:
2-6
Observe all safety and handling instructions on the packing boxes.
If Horizon II mini components are heavy, they should be installed using lifting
equipment, or with sufcient personnel available to ensure that regulations
covering Health and Safety are not breached.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Packaging crate
Handle cabinets and racked components with extreme caution, and in accordance
with any National and Regional Health and Safety regulations.
Only competent persons (In accordance with local regulations) may work on this
equipment. It is imperative that only appropriately trained personnel be allowed
to install, commission, and maintain the equipment, or remove the protective
covers for any purpose.
Motorola recommends the use of slings in conjunction with hydraulic lift

apparatus for moving and positioning heavy equipment.
Unauthorized access to Horizon II mini equipment and associated cabinets must

be prevented, therefore:
The Horizon II mini indoor must only be installed in a location where access
by unauthorized personnel can be prevented.
Similarly, the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure must only be installed in a
location where access by unauthorized personnel can be prevented, unless
the optional, street furniture kit is tted.
Packaging crate
Figure 2-2 depicts the following:
Construction of the shipping crate.
Method to open the packaging to obtain the installation manual.
68P02903W22-D
2-7
Dec 2007
Packaging crate
Figure 2-2 Typical shipping crate detail
2-8
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Equipment module packaging
Equipment module packaging

The equipment modules supplied are tted into the cabinet. The standard oor mounting
brackets are supplied inside the packaging.
The optional wall bracket or rack mounting bracket, if ordered, are supplied in separate
packages.
Unpacking the crate, mounting brackets and cabinet

The following describes the procedure for unpacking the equipment.
Read through the following procedure before starting to unpack and install the
equipment.
Tools
Use the following tools to dismantle the crate and unpack the cabinet:
Box cutter or small knife.
Shipping crate delivery

Refer to Figure 2-2 to dismantle the shipping crate.
Follow Procedure 2-1 for shipping crate delivery.
Procedure 2-1
1
Deliver the cabinet equipment to the site in its original packaging. Cut
the packaging tape.
The packing material used by Motorola is not returnable and

should be disposed of safely.
68P02903W22-D
Lift the lid clear of the crate and lift out the cardboard protective pieces.
Lift the box over thee cabinet.
Cut open and remove the barrier bag.
Locate the in-box documents.
2-9
Dec 2007
Safe disposal of packing material
Obtain mounting brackets

Follow Procedure 2-2 to obtain the mounting brackets.
Procedure 2-2
Obtain mounting brackets
Cut the plastic banding that secures the crate.
Locate and retain the packet containing the oor mounting brackets and
attachment screws.
Separating the cabinet from the crate
A fully equipped Horizon II mini cabinet can weigh up to 46 kg. Observe proper lifting
precautions in accordance with Health and Safety regulations.
Care must be taken to avoid damaging the cabinet in any way, especially by scratching
the outer surfaces.
Follow Procedure 2-3 to separate the cabinet from the crate base pallet.
Procedure 2-3 Separating the cabinet from the crate

1
Lift out the foam protective pieces.
Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet.
Lift cabinet off the delivery pallet, over the foam packing pieces.
Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet.
Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report any damage to the
transport company.

The packing material used by Motorola is not returnable and should be disposed of safely or
retained, in case, they are needed to return the equipment for servicing, or to transport it
to another location.
2-10
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
CTU2 allotted slot retention
CTU2 allotted slot retention

The CTU2s supplied already are tted in the cabinet, with the Tx cable correctly attached by
Motorola. The CTU2s must remain in the allotted slots for Motorola factory calibrations to be
valid.
68P02903W22-D
2-11
Dec 2007
Indoor mounting options
Indoor mounting options
The indoor cabinet may be:
Bolted to the oor using the oor mounting brackets.
Bolted to a wall mounting bracket.
Installed in a standard 19 inch equipment rack, using an adaptor frame. Up to two Horizon
II mini indoor cabinets may be installed per adaptor frame. Only one frame may be
installed per equipment rack, due to thermal constraints.
Optionally the indoor cabinet may also be installed in a weather proof enclosure, for
outdoor use. Refer to Installation instructions for outdoor enclosure for complete
installation, including tting indoor cabinet into enclosure.
The three indoor mounting options are shown in:
2-12
Figure 2-3 Floor mounting brackets on page 2-13.
Figure 2-4 Indoor wall mounting bracket on page 2-14.
Figure 2-5 19 inch rack adaptor frame on page 2-15.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Floor mount
Floor mount
Figure 2-3 shows the indoor cabinet secured with oor mounting brackets.
Figure 2-3
68P02903W22-D
Floor mounting brackets
2-13
Dec 2007
Indoor wall mount
Indoor wall mount

Figure 2-4 shows the indoor wall mounting bracket.
Figure 2-4 Indoor wall mounting bracket
2-14
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
19 inch rack mount
19 inch rack mount

Figure 2-5 shows the Horizon II mini cabinet mounted in a 19 inch rack adaptor frame, the
racking is omitted for clarity.
Figure 2-5 19 inch rack adaptor frame
68P02903W22-D
2-15
Dec 2007
Installing Horizon II mini indoor cabinet using oor mount
Installing Horizon II mini indoor cabinet using oor

mount
The Horizon II mini indoor cabinet is supplied with a pair of oor mounting brackets, to secure a
oor-standing cabinet. These brackets can be used on a smooth, level, concrete oor, or other
strong supportive construction. The brackets ensure correct stability, and require four M8
mounting or anchor bolts to secure them rmly in position.
The cabinet must be bolted to the oor using the supplied brackets. This
prevents danger from toppling. NEVER install the cabinet without the brackets,
and ALWAYS bolt the brackets to the oor. Ensure that the bolts selected for this
purpose are suitable.
This equipment must only be installed by suitably trained personnel.
At the customer's discretion a steel structure may also be used, with size, construction
and layout determined by a structural engineer. Reference should be made to Physical
Specications in this manual for details of equipment weights and dimensions.
The brackets are rst tted to the cabinet using the xings provided, then the cabinet is moved
into position and bolted to the oor. Figure 2-6 shows the brackets with dimensions for oor
anchor points, measured from the centre point of the holes.
2-16
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Recommended bolt length for oor mounting
Figure 2-6 Floor mounting brackets with drilling dimensions
Recommended bolt length for oor mounting

The bolt length and type used to attach the mounting brackets to the oor is determined by a
structural survey performed by the site architect.

The concrete oor, or other supporting construction, must be drilled to accept M8 anchor bolts.
Washers and bushes and the M8 steel bolts must be supplied by the customer.
68P02903W22-D
2-17
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 2-4 to install the cabinet on the oor.
Procedure 2-4 Floor mounting the cabinet
This procedure assumes the equipment is being tted to a concrete oor. Other
surfaces, such as steel frames, or non-concrete oor types requires the use of
different fasteners as determined by a structural engineer.
Attach the two mounting brackets to the cabinet sides as shown in Figure 2-7
using the four M6 screws and washers supplied.
Move the cabinet to the selected mounting position. Consider future as

well as present space requirements.
Mark the positions of the two oval mounting holes in the base of each
brackets. (See Figure 2-6).
Move the cabinet well away from the mounting position to avoid dust
contamination.
Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes.
Drilling concrete produces cement dust, which is harmful to

equipment and wiring.
Protect the cabinets and any nearby equipment from dust.
Use a tarpaulin, cloth, or plastic sheets to cover exposed

equipment.
Clean up any accumulated debris from the anchor installation

carefully before exposing the equipment.
Use drilling equipment suitable for cutting steel reinforced

concrete.
Drill out the four holes to a depth and clearance for an M8 anchor bolt, and
t the M8 mounting anchors to the holes in the oor.
6
Position the cabinet over the mounting anchor holes.

Continued
2-18
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 2-4 Floor mounting the cabinet (Continued)

7
Fit the anchor bolts with the bushes and washers, through the brackets,
to each anchor.
Tension up the anchor bolts and then check for alignment and level using a
spirit level.
When satised that the cabinet is correctly aligned, torque the bolts to the
correct value.
Torque values used with M8 anchor bolts depends on the anchor

bolt manufacturer. Check the manufacturers data for the correct
values.
Figure 2-7 Attaching the oor mounting brackets to the indoor cabinet
68P02903W22-D
2-19
Dec 2007
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
Optionally, the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet can be installed on a vertical surface or wall
using the optional wall mount.
At the customer's discretion a vertical steel structure may also be used, with size,
construction and layout determined by a structural engineer. Reference should be
made to Physical Specications in this manual for details of equipment weights and
dimensions.
Figure 2-8
Wall mounted Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
The wall mount is not supplied with the cabinet and must be ordered separately.
2-20
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Recommended bolt length and type

The bolt length and type used to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is determined by a
structural survey performed by the site architect, but must be of sufcient strength to withstand
a maximum gross weight of 50 kgs.
Assembling and installing the wall mount

The wall mount is supplied in two parts which must be assembled before installation.
The screws and washers required to assemble the wall mount and t the Horizon II
mini are contained within the packaging. Retain these until all mounting procedures
are completed.
Assembling the wall mount

Follow Procedure 2-5 to assemble the wall mount.
Procedure 2-5 Assembling the wall mount
68P02903W22-D
Carefully unpack the wall mounting bracket, locate and retain the packet
of xing screws.
Fit the lower section to the upright as shown in Figure 2-9 using eight M6
screws and eight washers, from the xing screws packet.
Secure the two sections using the eight M6 screws and washers supplied.
Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
2-21
Dec 2007
Figure 2-9 Assembling the indoor wall mount
Installing the wall mount
Wall mounted installations must be tted in a secure area.

Follow Procedure 2-6 to install the wall mount.
2-22
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 2-6 Installing the wall mount

1
Using the site specic installation plan, locate a suitable position to mount
the equipment.
Using the wall mount as a template mark the position for the six M10
mounting bolts.


equipment.


concrete.
Drill out the six holes to a depth and clearance for an M10 anchor bolt, and
t the mounting anchors to the holes in the wall.
4
Position the wall mount over the mounting anchor points.
to each anchor point.
spirit level.
When satised that the wall mount is correctly aligned, torque the bolts
to the correct value.
values.
68P02903W22-D
2-23
Dec 2007
Mounting instructions
This procedure assumes the equipment is being tted to a concrete wall. Other
vertical surfaces, such as steel frames, or non-concrete wall types requires the use of
Figure 2-10 Fitting Horizon II mini indoor cabinet to indoor wall mount
2-24
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 2-7 to mount the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet on the wall bracket.
Horizon II mini cabinets are heavy and should not be installed without the use of lifting
equipment unless sufcient personnel are available to ensure that any national and
regional Health and Safety regulations are not breached.
Procedure 2-7 Fitting the Horizon II mini to the wall mount

1
Locate the packet of xing screws retained in Procedure 2-5 Assembling

the wall mount on page 2-21.
Fit the two large mushroom headed screws to the top two holes on the
back of the cabinet.
A fully equipped Horizon II mini indoor cabinet can weigh up to 46

kg. Observe proper lifting precautions in accordance with Health
and Safety regulations.
Carefully lift the Horizon II mini cabinet onto the lower, support
section of the wall mount.
4
Lift the cabinet to align the mushroom headed screws with the keyhole
shaped slots at the top rear of the wall mount.
Push the screw heads through the larger section of the keyhole and lower
the cabinet until it rests on the support section of the wall mount, as shown
in Figure 2-10.
Secure the cabinet at the lower front, (as shown in Figure 2-9), using the two
M5 screws and washers from the xing screws packet, previously retained.
The screws are inserted from the underside of the wall mount
base.
Tighten to a torque of 3 Nm.
68P02903W22-D
2-25
Dec 2007
Rack mounting the Horizon II mini
Rack mounting the Horizon II mini
The Horizon II mini indoor cabinet can also be installed in a standard 19 inch equipment rack
using the optional rack mounting adaptor frame. The rack mount is not supplied with the
cabinet and must be ordered separately.
Rear access is required to the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet, for installation and
maintenance, therefore the racking must be installed to allow this.
Rack mounted cabinets must be installed in a secure area.
Recommended bolt type

Motorola recommend 12 M6 bolts and appropriately sized cage nuts are used to attach the
adaptor frame to the equipment rack. Fixings must be of sufcient strength to withstand a
maximum gross weight of 100 kgs.
The attachment bolts are not supplied with the rack mounting frame and must be
provided by the installer.
2-26
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Installing the adaptor frame
Installing the adaptor frame

Follow Procedure 2-8 to t the adaptor frame to 19 inch equipment racking.
Procedure 2-8 Installing the 19 inch adaptor frame

1
Carefully unpack the rack mounting frame, locate and retain the four 90
brackets and xing screws.
Use the adaptor frame as a template and t the selected cage nuts to the
appropriate positions on the 19 inch racking.
Position the adaptor frame, with the vent holes uppermost, and secure with
the top two M6 screws.
Fit the remaining 10 M6 screws.
Tighten the twelve screws to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
Installing a Horizon II mini cabinet into the adaptor frame

Follow Procedure 2-9 to install a Horizon II mini into the adaptor frame refer to Figure 2-11
Fitting Horizon II mini into the 19 inch rack adaptor frame on page 2-28.
Procedure 2-9 Rack mounting an indoor cabinet

1
Fit two of the, previously retained, 90 brackets to the top and bottom of the
Horizon II mini cabinet as shown in Figure 2-11, using four M4 countersunk
screws. Tighten to a torque of 2.2 Nm.
A fully equipped Horizon II mini indoor cabinet can weigh up to 46

kg. Observe proper lifting precautions in accordance with Health
Lift and slide the Horizon II mini cabinet into the racking.
3
Secure the 90 brackets to the adaptor frame with four M6 screws. Tighten
to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
The procedure is the same if a second cabinet is installed. If a second cabinet is not installed,
t the unused brackets to the frame for possible future use.
68P02903W22-D
2-27
Dec 2007
Installing a Horizon II mini cabinet into the adaptor frame
Figure 2-11 Fitting Horizon II mini into the 19 inch rack adaptor frame
equipment unless sufcient personnel are available to ensure that any national and
regional Health and Safety regulations are not breached.
2-28
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Earthing and transient protection
This section describes only general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to Grounding
guidelines for cellular radio installations, 68P81150E62, for detailed earthing information.
Site earthing
General earthing requirements are summarized as follows:
Each cabinet or enclosure must be earthed separately and not daisy chained together.
The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point as its power
source).
Provision should be made for routing earthing lines into the site and to the enclosure
before beginning the installation of the system enclosures.
The main earthing stud is located:

For Horizon II macro on the interface panel on top of each cabinet.
For Horizon II mini on the cabinet back panel, next to the dc power input module.
For Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure a pair of M6 site earthing terminals (studs) is
located on the bottom left of the enclosure base, at the interface plate. The studs are
25 mm apart to allow the use of double hole connections.
For Horizon II micro on the interface panel, next to the ac connector.
Refer to the Site-specic documentation for detailed site earthing information.
Transient and lightning protection

All backhaul lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection as part
of the BIB/BIM or T43/CIM board. Ensure that the receive and transmit antenna connections to
the equipment are fed through coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices.
The end user is responsible for transient protection of the backhaul lines connected
to Motorola equipment.
68P02903W22-D
2-29
Dec 2007
Connections to RF modules
The components shown in Figure 2-12 provides all the RF connections to the cabinet, and
internally within the cabinet. A maximum of four cabinets can be interconnected to form a
single BTS site.
2-30
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 2-12 Location of RF components
68P02903W22-D
2-31
Dec 2007
Types of RF connector
Types of RF connector
Table 2-2 lists the RF module connectors with their destinations.
Table 2-2
RF module connectors and destinations
RF module
Type of connector
Destination
CTU2
SMA
DUP (At rear)

CMB
SMA (at rear)
CTU2, or CMB
N-type
Mini-SURF
7/16
Antenna
SMA (underneath)
CTU2, or CMB
N-type
Mini-SURF
7/16
Antenna
CMB
N-type (IN)
N-type (OUT)
SMA of CTU2
Rx N-type of DUP
Mini-SURF
N-type
Rx N-type of DUP
DUP
PGSM duplexer
The PGSM duplexer is similar to the DUP, but operates in the PGSM RF band instead
of the EGSM band. All connection details are essentially the same.
Mini-SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables

Table 2-3 lists cable types used for Mini-SURF/Tx block interconnections.
Table 2-3
Part number
2-32
Description
Use
3086970W01
Coaxial cable terminated at both ends

with an SMA connector.
CTU2 to DUP
3086225N01
340 mm coaxial cable terminated at

either end with 90 N-type plugs.
3087395T01
Coaxial cable terminated at one end with

an SMA connector and at the other with
an N-type connector.
DUP to CMB
3087394T01

a N-type connector.
CTU2 to CMB
DUP to Mini-SURF
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Unused SMA connections
Unused SMA connections

Ensure that any unused SMA inputs to DUPs are tted with 50 ohm 100 W termination loads.
RF connector torque settings

Table 2-4 lists the correct Torque values for RF connectors.
Care should be taken when tightening SMA connectors to avoid damage by excess
force.
Table 2-4 Torque values for all RF connectors

Size of connector
SMA
N-Type
7/16
Torque value
(Nm)
1 Nm
3.4 Nm
25 Nm
RF connection principles
The primary receive path is connected to the A branch of the Mini-SURF module. This is
normally duplexed with the transmit signal on a single antenna, and fed to the Mini-SURF from
the Rx connector on the DUP. The diversity receive path is connected to the B path on the
Mini-SURF, either directly or from the Rx connector on the DUP in non-diversity congurations.
Within any single cabinet the lowest numbered sector is normally connected to amplier 0
connections, and higher numbered sectors to amplier 1. For example, sector one is connected
to Mini-SURF connectors 0A and 0B, sector two to 1A and 1B.
Since there are no expansion ports on the Mini-SURF, a sector cannot be split
between two cabinets.
The transmit path feeds from the CTU2 to the Tx block mounted behind. The output of one,
or both CTU2s can be fed into the DUP, depending on whether the connection is direct or
indirect (through a hybrid combiner (CMB)). The DUP then duplexes the Tx signal with the Rx
signal, before feeding to the antenna.
Figure 2-13 shows the RF transmit signal path options between the CTU2 and DUP.
68P02903W22-D
2-33
Dec 2007
RF connection principles
Figure 2-13 CTU2 to DUP RF Tx path options
2-34
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing
Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing

Duplexing allows a single antenna to be used for both transmit and receive operations. Normally
duplexed RF signals are handled by one antenna, with a second receive antenna to provide
diversity.
If a single antenna (non-diversity) is required, the duplex antenna RF receive cable

from the DUP must be connected to the Rx A path at the Mini-SURF. Simply switching
off diversity at the OMC-R without the correct Mini-SURF conguration causes a loss
of reception.
68P02903W22-D
2-35
Dec 2007
Suggested RF congurations
The following series of RF conguration diagrams shows suggested ways of connecting together
Horizon II mini Mini-SURF, CMB and DUPs to meet different operational requirements. The
series of diagrams is by no means exhaustive, and numerous alternative congurations may be
adopted to achieve the required aim.
Each Horizon II mini cabinet is represented by two views, front and rear, showing populated
as appropriate.
Digital module slots.
CTU2 slots.
A Mini-SURF module.
DUP slots.
One CMB slot (populated if bow tie).
Interconnecting cables.
Antenna connecting cables, not supplied as part of the Horizon II mini equipment, are shown as
red lines.
The diagrams are applicable to the following:
EGSM900 or GSM1800 single band operation.
GSM single carrier.
Dual carrier and EGPRS.
Single carrier power output gures.
These are given for each conguration.

Diversity is assumed in all RF conguration diagrams shown here. For non diversity, the single
receive path is always connected to branch A at the Mini-SURF module.
The RF conguration diagrams in this section are diagrammatic representations and

are not intended to accurately reect the actual physical layout of equipment.
Digital connections
Digital connections between cabinets are not shown in detail in the following diagrams. Fibre
optic cables used to provide digital connections between cabinets are described in Connecting
bre optic cables.
2-36
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Assumptions
These assumptions apply to all the following RF conguration diagrams:
All unused slots are tted with blanking plates, wherever appropriate.
All unused CMB connectors are tted with, customer supplied, 50 ohm 100 W terminating
loads.
68P02903W22-D
2-37
Dec 2007
Conguration for omni 1 or 2

Figure 2-14 shows a suggested conguration, using one Horizon II mini cabinet, for omni 1
or 2 with duplexer.
Figure 2-14 Single cabinet, omni 1 or 2 with DUP
2-38
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Table 2-5 Single cabinet, omni 1 or 2 with DUP

Conguration
Output Power
900 MHz
1800 MHz
Omni 1 GSM single carrier
63 W (+48.0 dBm)
50 W (+47.0 dBm)
Omni 2 GSM dual carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
Omni 1 EGPRS single

carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
68P02903W22-D
2-39
Dec 2007

Figure 2-15 shows a suggested conguration, using one Horizon II mini cabinet, for omni 2 or 4
with duplexers and air combining.
Figure 2-15 Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with DUP and air combining
2-40
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Conguration for omni 2 or 4 with bow tie
Table 2-6 Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with DUP and air combining
Conguration
Output Power
900 MHz
1800 MHz
63 W (+48.0 dBm)
50 W (+47.0 dBm)
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
Omni 2 EGPRS single

carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)

Figure 2-16 shows a suggested conguration, using one Horizon II mini cabinet, for omni 2 or 4
with two duplexers and hybrid combining in a bow tie arrangement.
This conguration is particularly useful for long, narrow ribbon cells. Its advantage over
a sectored site is that no hand-over is required when a subscriber moves from one side of
the BTS to the other. Its advantage over an omni-directional site is that antenna gain can be
used to increase the effective length of the cell and concentrate capacity where it is needed.
Figure 2-17 shows a functional diagram of this conguration with a representation of the
approximate antenna spread pattern.
Diversity must be software enabled for bow tie conguration, even though sector
antennas not using diversity.
68P02903W22-D
2-41
Dec 2007
Figure 2-16
2-42
Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with two DUP and CMB in bow tie
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Table 2-7 Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with two DUP and CMB in bow tie
Conguration
Output Power
900 MHz
1800 MHz
32 W (+45.0 dBm)
26 W (+44.0 dBm)
10 W (+40.0 dBm)
8 W (+36.0 dBm)
Omni 2 EGPRS single

carrier
10 W (+40.0 dBm)
8 W (+36.0 dBm)
Power gures listed above are split equally between both antennas.
68P02903W22-D
2-43
Dec 2007
Figure 2-17 Functional diagram of Bow tie conguration
2-44
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Conguration for sector 1/1 or 2/2

Figure 2-18 shows a suggested conguration, using a single Horizon II mini cabinet, for sector
1/1 or sector 2/2 with duplexers.
Figure 2-18 Single cabinet, sector 1/1 or 2/2 with DUP
68P02903W22-D
2-45
Dec 2007
Table 2-8 Single cabinet, sector 1/1 or 2/2 with DUP

Conguration
2-46
Output Power
900 MHz
1800 MHz
1/1 GSM single carrier
63 W (+48.0 dBm)
50 W (+47.0 dBm)
2/2 GSM dual carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
1/1 EGPRS single carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Conguration for two cabinet, sector 2/2 or 4/4

Figure 2-19 shows a suggested conguration, using a two Horizon II mini cabinets, for sector
2/2 or sector 4/4 with duplexers and air combining.
Figure 2-19 Two cabinet, sector 2/2 or 4/4 with DUP and air combining
68P02903W22-D
2-47
Dec 2007
Table 2-9 Two cabinet, sector 2/2 or 4/4 with DUP and air combining
Conguration
2-48
Output Power
900 MHz
1800 MHz
2/2 GSM single carrier
63 W (+48.0 dBm)
50 W (+47.0 dBm)
4/4 GSM dual carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
2/2 EGPRS single carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Conguration for two cabinet, sector 1/1/1 or 2/2/2

Figure 2-20 shows a suggested conguration, using two Horizon II mini cabinets, for sector
1/1/1 or sector 2/2/2 with duplexers.
Figure 2-20 Two cabinet, sector 1/1/1 or 2/2/2 with DUP
68P02903W22-D
2-49
Dec 2007
Table 2-10
Two cabinet, sector 1/1/1 or 2/2/2 with DUP
Conguration
2-50
Output Power
900 MHz
1800 MHz
1/1/1 GSM single carrier
63 W (+48.0 dBm)
50 W (+47.0 dBm)
2/2/2 GSM dual carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
1/1/1 EGPRS single carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Conguration for three cabinet, sector 2/2/2 or 4/4/4

Figure 2-21 shows a suggested conguration, using three Horizon II mini cabinets, for sector
2/2/2 or sector 4/4/4 with duplexers and air combining.
Figure 2-21
68P02903W22-D
Three cabinet, sector 2/2/2 or 4/4/4 with DUP and air combining
2-51
Dec 2007
Table 2-11 Three cabinet, sector 2/2/2 or 4/4/4 with DUP and air combining
Conguration
2-52
Output Power
900 MHz
1800 MHz
2/2/2 GSM single carrier
63 W (+48.0 dBm)
50 W (+47.0 dBm)
4/4/4 GSM dual carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
2/2/2 EGPRS single carrier
20 W (+43.0 dBm)
16 W (+42.0 dBm)
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Back panel cabling
Back panel cabling
All cabinet signal and data connectors are located on the back panel. Each connector is marked
with the appropriate label. Power and earth connectors are also located on the back panel.
The back panel has integral wells for the site expansion board and the duplexers and provides
securing points for the Mini-SURF module and battery unit.
Expansion cabinet bre optic cables are not connected directly to the back panel, but are
connected directly to the site expansion board.
Back panel diagram

Figure 2-22 shows the locations of the back panel connectors and components.
68P02903W22-D
2-53
Dec 2007
Back panel diagram
Figure 2-22
2-54
Back panel connector locations
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connector pinout tables
Connector pinout tables
Keep the plastic connector covers supplied by Motorola on unused connectors to

protect from damage by static or foreign matter.
The following tables list the signal and data connector pinouts:
External alarms (see Table 2-12 and accompanying information).
PIX (see Table 2-13).
BIB/BIM (see Table 2-14).
T43/CIM (see Table 2-15).
External alarms connector

The external alarms connector is used by the outdoor enclosure. When this connector is not in
use, a shorting plug, Motorola part number 2886169N01, is inserted. This plug must be
removed to allow connection of the alarm cable from the outdoor BTS and should be retained
for retting during decommissioning of the BTS.
If this shorting plug is removed, in an indoor site, the BTS becomes

non-operational.
An optional tilt switch may be added to the BTS and connected to external
alarms connector.
The shorting plug joins pairs of pins as listed in Table 2-12.
Table 2-12 External alarms pin shorts (37-way D-type)
68P02903W22-D
Pin Numbers
Pin Numbers
Pin Numbers
Pin Numbers
1 + 2
11
21 + 22
32
3 + 4
12
23 + 24
33
5 + 6
13 + 14
25 + 26
34
7 + 8
15 + 16
27 + 28
35
17 + 18
29 + 30
36 + 37
10
19 + 20
31
2-55
Dec 2007
PIX inputs/outputs
PIX inputs/outputs
The PIX connector provides connection for external equipment and external alarm sensors, the
use of which can be dened by the customer.
PIX outputs
PIX outputs are switched by four relays, under control of the alarm board and HIISC. The
relays have multiple contacts, some normally open and some normally closed. The contacts
are rated for 1 A at 30 V. The contacts may be used for control of external equipment such
as fans or audible alarms.
PIX inputs
PIX inputs comprise 18 connections to external sensors. These inputs report alarms to the BSC,
through the alarm board and HIISC. The BSC forwards the alarms to the OMC-R. The end-user
supplies the external sensors, which must open or close a current loop. Each sensor connects
across an opto-coupled pair of PIX inputs (eight per PIX connector).
Only 12 PIX inputs are available to the Horizon II mini, the other four are set high to
indicate to the network that this BTS is a different cabinet type from Horizon II macro.
All sensors must be dry-contact type with the following specication:
5 kohm or greater across sense inputs for logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler off).
500 ohm or less across sense inputs for logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).
PIX connector pinout

Table 2-13 lists the PIX connections.
Table 2-13 PIX pin connections (37-way D-type)

Pin
Number
Signal/Description
Pin
Number
Signal/Description
Site input Extension 1-1
20
21
22
23
Continued
2-56
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Table 2-13
BIB/BIM interconnection
PIX pin connections (37-way D-type) (Continued)
Pin
Number
Signal/Description
Pin
Number
Signal/Description
24
25
26
27
28
10
Not connected
29
Site output relay 1 - NC
11
Site output relay 1 - NO
30
Site output relay 1 - COM
12
31
13
32
14
33
15
34
16
35
17
36
18
37
19
To comply with North American safety regulations, BIB/BIM twisted pair cables must
be 26 AWG minimum.
Connection is made using a 37-pin D-type connector to both the BIB/BIM and the external PCM
twisted pair circuit lines. Figure 2-23 shows a typical BIB/BIM and Table 2-14 lists BIB/BIM
interconnections.
68P02903W22-D
2-57
Dec 2007
Figure 2-23 BIB/BIM
Table 2-14 BIB/BIM interconnections

Pin
Pin
Equipment/Extension
Number
Number
Pin
Pin
Equipment/Extension
Number
Number
J0-1
Tx1 +
J1-1
J0-20
Tx1
J1-20
J0-2
Rx1 +
J1-2
J0-21
Rx1
J1-21
J0-4
Tx4 +
J1-4
J0-23
Tx4
J1-23
J0-5
Rx4 +
J1-5
J024
Rx4
J124
J0-7
Tx2 +
J1-7
J0-26
Tx2
J1-26
J0-8
Rx2 +
J1-8
J0-27
Rx2
J1-27
J0-10
Tx5 +
J1-10
J0-29
Tx5
J1-29
J0-11
Rx5 +
J1-11
J0-30
Rx5
J1-30
J0-13
Tx3 +
J1-13
J0-32
Tx3
J1-32
J0-14
Rx3 +
J1-14
J0-33
Rx3
J1-33
J0-16
Tx6 +
J1-16
J0-35
Tx6
J1-35
J0-17
Rx6 +
J1-17
J0-36
Rx6
J1-36
Connector J0 and J1 pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are connected to earth.
2-58
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
T43/CIM interconnection
To comply with North American safety regulations, the T43/CIM coaxial cable inner
core must be 26 AWG minimum.
Connection is made using a 37-pin D-type connector to the interconnect board and twelve type
43 coaxial connectors to the external E1 circuit lines. Figure 2-24 shows a typical T43/CIM, and
Table 2-15 lists the T43/CIM interconnections.
Figure 2-24
68P02903W22-D
T43/CIM
2-59
Dec 2007
Table 2-15 T43/CIM interconnections

Pin
Number
Equipment/
Extension
Pin Number
J0-1
Tx1 +
J1 Centre
J0-2
Rx1 +
J0-4
Pin
Number
Equipment/
Extension
Pin Number
J0-20
Tx1
J1 Shield
J2 Centre
J0-21
Rx1
J2 Shield
Tx4 +
J4 Centre
J0-23
Tx4
J4 Shield
J0-5
Rx4 +
J5 Centre
J024
Rx4
J5 Shield
J0-7
Tx2 +
J7 Centre
J0-26
Tx2
J7 Shield
J0-8
Rx2 +
J8 Centre
J0-27
Rx2
J8 Shield
J0-10
Tx5 +
J10 Centre
J0-29
Tx5
J10 Shield
J0-11
Rx5 +
J11 Centre
J0-30
Rx5
J11 Shield
J0-13
Tx3 +
J13 Centre
J0-32
Tx3
J13 Shield
J0-14
Rx3 +
J14 Centre
J0-33
Rx3
J14 Shield
J0-16
Tx6 +
J16 Centre
J0-35
Tx6
J16 Shield
J0-17
Rx6 +
J17 Centre
J0-36
Rx6
J17 Shield
Connector J0 pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are not used.
2-60
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
LIU-NIU - E1 mapping
LIU-NIU - E1 mapping
The NIU network interface (E1) links connect to a single T43 (CIM) or BIB (BIM) board by a
single connector and cable.
NIU to T43 (CIM)/BIB (BIM) mapping

NIU2 mms to line interface mappings in Horizon II BTSs are identical. Table 2-16 shows the
mapping from MSI 0 to T43 (CIM) and BIB (BIM). Table 2-17 shows the mapping from MSI 1 to
T43 (CIM) and BIB (BIM).
Table 2-16
MSI 0 to T43 (CIM) and BIB (BIM) mapping
NIU port
T43 (CIM)
BIB (BIM)
0/0
J1/J2
J0/1 Tx1+ & J0/20, TX1,

J0/2 RX1+ & J0/21 RX1
0/1
J7/J8
J0/7 Tx2+ & J0/26, TX2,

J0/8 RX2+ & J0/27 RX2
0/2
J13/J14
J0/13 Tx3+ & J0/32, TX3,

J0/14 RX3+ & J0/33 RX3
Table 2-17
MSI 1 to T43 (CIM) and BIB (BIM) mapping
NIU port
T43 (CIM)
BIB (BIM)
1/0
J4/J5
J0/4 Tx4+ & J0/23, TX4,

J0/5 RX4+ & J0/24 RX4
1/1
J10/J11
J0/10 Tx5+ & J0/29, TX5,

J0/11 RX5+ & J0/30 RX5
1/2
J16/J17
J0/16 Tx6+ & J0/35, TX5,

J0/17 RX6+ & J0/36 RX5
Default RSL mappings are the same as all other BTS platforms.
68P02903W22-D
2-61
Dec 2007
Care of optical bers
Care of optical bers
Optical ber cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of glass coated by a cladding
(sometimes in two layers), and an outer protective sheath which provides mechanical protection.
The ber acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly light must be
propagated with minimal losses from end-to-end of the ber. A number of problems can prevent
this from happening, resulting in a potentially faulty link. Care must be taken to ensure that
the conditions that follow are met.
Minimum bend radius

All optical bers have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallest circle that is allowed
to be formed from a loop of ber, that is how tight it can be coiled, looped or bent.
Do not bend bers tighter than the minimum bend radius, under any circumstances.
If bers are bent tighter than the minimum bend radius then two possible effects can happen.
2-62
Excessive light loss can occur from the outside of the bend, resulting in a loss of
performance.
The ber can fracture due to microscopic imperfections in the surface. This type of break
is invisible externally. If such a break occurs, excessive light loss would be permanent and
light would be scattered and reected from the break in the ber. Straightening the ber
will not help and the whole assembly will require replacement.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Protecting bers and connectors
The long term minimum bend radius for ber optic cables is shown in Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Fiber optic minimum bend radius
If the ber is under tension (being stretched), the bend radius should be much larger, at least
doubled. This is because the tension in the ber can increase the possibilities of damage.
If in doubt about the radius, the ber should be allowed to form its natural bend radius by
allowing it to bend under gravity only. This natural bend radius is normally greater than the
minimum bend radii shown.
Protecting bers and connectors

To maintain good light transmission through the ber optic link it is essential to maintain
cleanliness of the connector end surfaces and/or bare ber ends.
At all times when bers are not connected into the system, the connector protective caps
(normally red) should be tted and kept in place. This is especially important when routing
bers during installation.
68P02903W22-D
2-63
Dec 2007
Cleaning bers and connectors
Cleaning bers and connectors

Cleanliness of ber terminations and connectors is essential. If cleaning of contaminated optical
components is required, then all areas should be wiped gently with a lint free cloth soaked in a
suitable cleaning solution. Care should be taken to ensure that the ends of the bers are not
scratched in any way, and are completely dry before reconnection.
Connectors for ber optic cables

Fiber ST connectors are used to terminate the ber optic cables. These are push t and should
not be tightened when connecting.
2-64
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connecting ber optic cables
Connecting ber optic cables
In an installation congured with more than one Horizon II cabinet or enclosure, ber optic
connections are used to link the site expansion board in the master cabinet or enclosure to the
site expansion board in the expansion cabinet or enclosures. A maximum of three expansion
cabinet or enclosures can be added to the master cabinet or enclosure.
An additional site expansion board must be tted in each cabinet or enclosure if redundancy is
required (determined by a redundant HIISC being installed in the master cabinet or enclosure).
This also requires that redundant XMUXs are installed in each slave cabinet or enclosure.
HIISC and XMUX redundancy are not supported in Horizon II micro.
Fibre optic cables for expansion cabinets or enclosures

Three different types of ber optic cable, colored orange and terminated with ST ber
connectors, are available for connecting expansion cabinet or enclosures. These are described
in Table 2-18 to Table 2-19.
Table 2-18 Horizon II macro and Horizon II mini expansion cabinet bre optic cable
pairs
68P02903W22-D
Order number
Length
Description
SVKN1244
5.6 m long
Connects Master cabinet to First expansion.
SVKN1245
7.6 m long
Connects Master cabinet to Second

expansion.
SVKN1246
7.6 m long
Connects Master cabinet to Third expansion.
2-65
Dec 2007
Connecting ber optic cables between cabinet or enclosures
Table 2-19
Horizon II micro expansion enclosure ber optic cable pairs
Order number
Length
Description
SVKN1244
5.6 m long
Connects master enclosure to rst expansion, (indoor use

only).
SVKN1245
7.6 m long
Connects master enclosure to second expansion, (indoor use

only).
SVKN5973
7 m long
Connects master enclosure to rst expansion, (outdoor use

only).
SVKN5969
10 m long
Connects master enclosure to expansion, (indoor or outdoor

use).
SVKN5972
20 m long

use).
SVKN5971
50 m long

use).
SVKN6070
100 m long

use).
SVKN5970
1000 m
long

use).

Procedure 2-10 Connecting optical bers on page 2-66 details how to connect optical ber cables
between master and expansion cabinet or enclosures in multiple cabinet or enclosure sites.
Do not look directly into a ber optic cable or the data in/out connectors of the
site expansion board, with or without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can
come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated ber optic cables
connected to data in/out connectors.
Check that the ac power has not been connected or isolate the ac power before
commencing the following procedure.
Proceed as follows to connect ber optic cables.
Procedure 2-10 Connecting optical bers

1
Remove appropriate doors, hoods, the solar cover, cable entry box access
covers or other access panels from master and expansion cabinets or
enclosures (if tted).
Continued
2-66
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 2-10 Connecting optical bers (Continued)

2
At the master cabinet or enclosure, connect the push-t ST connectors of the

ber optic cables to the IN 0 and OUT 0 ports on the site expansion board
(see Figure 2-26).
Do not use any tools, such as pliers, to connect ST ber connectors,

under any circumstances.
3
Route the ber optic cables to the expansion cabinet or enclosure, following
existing cable layout as far as possible.
Do not bend bers tighter than the minimum bend radius, under
any circumstances.
4
At the expansion cabinet or enclosure (slave), connect the push-t ST

connectors of the ber optic cables to the OUT 0 and IN 0 ports on the site
expansion board.
The master cabinet or enclosure OUT port must connect to the

expansion cabinet or enclosure IN port, and the master cabinet or
enclosure IN port to the expansion cabinet or enclosure OUT port.
68P02903W22-D
Repeat step 2 to step 4 for additional expansion cabinet or enclosures,

connecting the ber optic cables to port 1 and port 2 as required.
Once the ber optic cables are connected to the site expansion boards, t
strain relief clips to the handles of each site expansion board (shown in
Figure 2-26 ) to secure the cables in position.
Tighten any interface panel cable glands used, to ensure a weather proof seal.
Ret appropriate doors, hoods, the solar cover, cable entry box access covers
or other access panels to master and expansion cabinets or enclosures.
2-67
Dec 2007
Figure 2-26
2-68
Fiber optic connectors on the site expansion board
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
GPS connection
GPS connection
The GPS connector is an optional item that can be supplied already tted on the site expansion
board (see Figure 2-27). The connector is a 15-way D-type.
GPS connector location

Figure 2-27 shows the GPS connector location on the site expansion board.
Figure 2-27 GPS connector on site expansion board
68P02903W22-D
2-69
Dec 2007
GPS connector pinouts
GPS connector pinouts

Table 2-20 lists the GPS connector pinouts.
Table 2-20
2-70
GPS pin connections (15 way D-Type)
Pin No
Signal/Description
Pin No
Signal/Description
GPS power 1
GPS power 2
Not connected
10
Not connected
chassis earth
11
PPS positive
Tx negative
12
PPS negative
Tx positive
13
Rx positive
Rx negative
14
VPP
Earth
15
GPS return 2
GPS return 1
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Installing and connecting safety, power and earth cabling
Installing and connecting safety, power and earth

cabling
This section describes the procedure for connecting power and earth cabling to the cabinet.
Observe the following points when installing power and earth cabling:
The DC power supply to the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet must incorporate a
suitable over-current device rated at less than 63 A.
Use the twin earth studs, located at bottom left of the back panel to earth the
indoor cabinet.
Do not daisy chain cabinet earths together.
Cabinets must be earthed with a conductor equal to or larger than the supply
power cables and capable of carrying the full fault current of the over-current
protection device.
Do not make input power connections at the main power source at this time.
Connecting input power on page 2-85 is the nal installation procedure in this
chapter.
Power specications can be found in Electrical and RF Specications.
68P02903W22-D
2-71
Dec 2007
Cable routing
Cable routing
To prevent damage to the equipment:
Ensure that covers are tted to any unused connectors on the cabinet interface
panel; the covers protect the connectors from damage by static electricity or
foreign matter.
Do not make DC input power connections at the main DC power source at this
time.
The external converter supplying power to the cabinet must have double or
reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits.
The external converter that supplies power to the cabinet must meet safety
standard EN 60950.
An adequate means should be provided for routing cables from the main power source to the
equipment, such as a cable trough or conduit.
The current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service is affected by all of

the following factors (Reference IEC 364):
Ambient temperature
Grouping
Partial or total enclosure in thermal insulating material
Frequency (AC only)
Cabinet earthing and ESP connection points

The main earth connection point comprises twin 12 mm M6 threaded studs, (25 mm spacing)
on the back panel (See Figure 2-28). This connection is for both protective earthing and
functional earthing of the cabinet.
2-72
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 2-28 Cabinet earthing points
Additional cabinet earths are:
Door to cabinet frame.
Back panel AC connector.
ESP earth connection point.
An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling electronic modules, including the HIISC,
XMUX, Alarm module, Site expansion board, CTU2 and Mini-SURF. ESP earthing
connection points are provided on the upper left side at the front of the cabinet (See Figure 2-29).
Do not wear an anti static wrist strap while servicing the power supplies or power
distribution cabling, as serious personal injury can result.
68P02903W22-D
2-73
Dec 2007
Figure 2-29
2-74
ESP connection point
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Safety when installing power supply and earth cables
observed:
the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet before connection of the power supply cable to
The cabinet earth cable must be equal to or larger than the power supply cables.
Horizon II mini equipment operates from potentially hazardous voltages. Only

competent persons, (In accordance with local regulations) may work on this
equipment.

Power supply cable color coding
Ensure that the PSU tted correctly matches the supply source voltage.
This section describes the most commonly used color coding schemes for power supply cables.
Motorola recommends conformance with these standards.
+27 V DC cabinets
To connect a +27 V DC (negative earth) cabinet to the main DC power source. Observe the
following rules:
The 27 volt (+ ve) power cable is red.
The 0 volt (- ve) cable is black.
68P02903W22-D
2-75
Dec 2007
+ 27 V DC cable connection procedure
-48 to 60 V DC cabinets
To connect a -48 to 60 V DC (positive earth) cabinet to the main DC power source, Observe
the following rules:
The -48 to 60 volt (- ve) power cable is blue.
The 0 volt (+ ve) cable is black.
Single phase AC
For single phase AC connections:
The line power cable is brown or red.
The neutral cable is blue or black.
The protective earth cable is green or green and yellow.
+ 27 V DC cable connection procedure

Follow Procedure 2-11 to connect DC power cables to a + 27 V DC cabinet.
Procedure 2-11
+ 27 V DC cabling procedure
Each cabinet must be earthed separately. Do not daisy chain

cabinets together.
Route the earth wire from the building master earth and connect to the
main cabinet earth stud on the back panel (See Figure 2-29 ESP connection
point on page 2-74). Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
2
Do not make input power connections at the main power source

at this time. Connecting input power on page 2-85 is the nal
installation procedure in this chapter.
Thread the cone-shaped plastic covers onto the cables before connection.
Continued
2-76
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
- 48 to 60 V DC cable connection procedure
Procedure 2-11 + 27 V DC cabling procedure (Continued)

3
Connect the black 0 volt (- ve) DC power cable to the 0 V terminal on the
DC connector block (See Figure 2-30, on page 2-79 ), and route to the main
DC power source.
Connect the red 27 volt (+ ve) DC power cable to the V IN terminal on

the DC connector block (See Figure 2-30, on page 2-79), and route to the
main DC power source.
Tighten the DC power connections (M10 nuts on studs with at washers) to

the correct torque of 5 Nm.
The + 27 volt DC power cable connection procedure is now complete.

Procedure 2-12 to connect DC power cables to a -48 to 60 V DC cabinet.
Procedure 2-12 - 48 to 60 V DC cabling procedure

cabinets together.
main cabinet earth stud on the back panel (See Figure 2-28 Cabinet
earthing points on page 2-73). Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
2

Thread the cone-shaped plastic covers onto the cables before connection.
3
Connect the black 0 volt (+ ve) DC power cable to the 0 V terminal on the
DC connector block (See Figure 2-30, on page 2-79), and route to the main
DC power source.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
2-77
Dec 2007
Procedure 2-12
- 48 to 60 V DC cabling procedure (Continued)
Connect the blue -48 to 60 volt (- ve) DC power cable to the V IN terminal
on the DC connector block (See Figure 2-30, on page 2-79), and route to
the main DC power source.
Tighten the DC power connections (M10 nuts on studs with at washers) to

the correct torque of 5 Nm.
The -48 to 60 volt DC power cable connection procedure is now complete.
2-78
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Cable connection procedure for AC
Figure 2-30 View of DC connector block and AC input recessed plug connector

The single phase AC input is through a recessed plug connector into which an AC supply cable
terminated with a standard type IEC320 socket, (supplied with indoor AC cabinets), may be
connected.
68P02903W22-D
2-79
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 2-13 to connect AC power cables to a single phase cabinet.
Procedure 2-13
Single phase AC cabling procedure

cabinets together.
main cabinet earth stud on the back panel (See Figure 2-28 Cabinet
earthing points on page 2-73). Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
2
For connection to AC supply, use correct socket type,

protective device and appropriately rated cable, selected in
accordance with National and regional wiring regulations.
If assembling a cable and socket for connection to this AC

input, ensure live, neutral and earth connections within the
socket match equivalent plug connections. That is, live
connects to live, neutral to neutral and earth to earth.
The protective earth connection is made at the earth terminal

of the AC connector.
To ensure the integrity of protective earthing the main earth

cable must be permanently connected to the site master
earth.
If necessary terminate the supply cable and assemble the connector, (In
accordance, with the connector manufactures instructions).
3
Route AC cable to the main AC power source.

Insert the IEC320 socket into the AC input recessed plug connector on the
back panel (as shown in Figure 2-30, on page 2-79).
5
Secure the connector in place using the cable clamp supplied with the
Horizon II mini.
The single phase AC power cable connection procedure is now complete.
2-80
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Installing the Horizon II mini optional battery module
The Horizon II mini is supplied without the optional battery module tted.
68P02903W22-D
2-81
Dec 2007
Figure 2-31 Horizon II mini optional battery module
2-82
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 2-32
Rear view of Horizon II mini, showing battery module well
Fitting the Horizon II mini optional battery module requires the replacement of the
external alarms shorting plug by the one supplied with the battery module.
68P02903W22-D
2-83
Dec 2007
Horizon II mini battery module installation procedure
Horizon II mini battery module installation procedure

Follow Procedure 2-14 to t the Horizon II mini battery module.
Procedure 2-14
Fitting the optional battery module
Unpack the separately supplied battery module and dispose of

the packaging safely and in accordance with local regulations.
Refer to Figure 2-32 and remove the battery connector cover

plate, using a slotted screwdriver. (Retain the screws and cover
plate for ret on battery removal).
Insert the battery module with the switch at the top, and press
rmly into place.
Secure the battery module using the two captive M4 Torx screws
and tighten to a torque of 2.2 Nm using a T25 Torx driver.
Select one of the following:

IF:
The Horizon II mini is an indoor
installation.
THEN...
Remove the standard

shorting plug from
the external alarms
connector on the back
panel.
This results
in the cabinet
resetting.
The Horizon II mini is already

installed in an outdoor
enclosure.
2-84
Retain the standard

shorting plug, in a
safe location, for use
during redeployment or
decommissioning.
Fit the shorting plug

supplied with the battery
module to the external
alarms connector on the
back panel.
Disconnect the 2way

mate-n-lock connector on
the outdoor enclosure alarms
cable, to enable the low
voltage alarm.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connecting input power
Connecting input power comprises:
Pre-connection checks.
Connecting previously installed power cables (either AC or DC), to the building or site
power source.
Pre-connection checks
At this point of the installation process, ensure that:
The equipment is not already connected to the main AC or DC power source.
The equipment is connected to the AC or DC power cabling.
PSUs in the equipment are the correct type for the external power supply voltage.
observed:
68P02903W22-D

competent persons, (In accordance with local regulations) may work on this
equipment.

2-85
Dec 2007
Connecting DC power
Connecting DC power
Do not wear an anti static wrist strap while servicing the power supplies or power
distribution cabling, as serious personal injury can result.
The external converter supplying the equipment must have double or reinforced
insulation between its primary and secondary circuits, and must conform to
Safety Standard IEC 60950.
Perform any adjustments recommended by the manufacturer on the main power

supply equipment before connecting DC power cables to the main DC power
source.
For +27 V DC operation, input to the base station must remain between 19.5
V and 30 V under all load conditions.
For 48 V DC operation, input to the base station must remain between 39

V and 72 V DC.
Follow Procedure 2-15 to connect DC power to the equipment.
Procedure 2-15 Connecting DC power

1
Turn off the main DC power supply.
Use a voltmeter to ensure that power is not present.
Route and secure the DC power and earth cables from the equipment to
the building power supply.
Horizon II mini equipment operates from potentially hazardous

voltages. Only competent persons, (In accordance with local
regulations) may make the electrical connections in the following
steps.
Connect the earth wire to the building master earth.

Continued
2-86
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connecting AC power
Procedure 2-15 Connecting DC power (Continued)

5
Connect the 0 V lead of the input DC power cable to the 0 V terminal of the
main DC power supply. See Installing and connecting safety, power and
earth cabling on page 2-71 in this manual.
Connect the V IN lead of the input DC power cable to the V IN terminal (+27
V or -48 to 60 V, as appropriate for the equipment PSU type) of the main DC
power supply. See Installing and connecting safety, power and earth cabling
on page 2-71 in this manual.
If required, ensure that all correct Request for Connection and Completion and Inspection
Form have been sent to the local electricity supply board. Forms are provided in Chapter 5
Commissioning the Horizon II mini in this manual.
Connecting AC power
Ensure that the AC power supply input has been safely isolated, so that there is no
risk of power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be
isolated and locked, and warning label attached.
Follow Procedure 2-16 to connect AC power to the equipment.
Procedure 2-16 Connecting AC power
Isolate the AC power source and lock the isolator switch.
Route and secure the AC power cable from the equipment to the building
AC power supply.

voltages. Only competent persons, (In accordance with local
regulations) may make the electrical connections in this step.
Connect the AC power cable to the building main power supply.

4
Unlock the isolator switch.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
2-87
Connecting AC power
2-88
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Chapter
3
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure
installation
This chapter provides the information required to install Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure and
the internal and external interfaces.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
3-1
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation overview
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation overview
This section introduces the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure components on page 3-3 and lists
the topics covered in this chapter. It also covers E1 line testing and regulatory compliance.
Introduction to outdoor enclosure installation
Ensure that all site associated equipment is completely installed before commissioning
the site for operation.
Some site equipment may not be produced by Motorola, including battery chargers,
power supplies, and antennas. Refer to Site-specic documentation and Non-Motorola
vendor instructions.
Before starting an installation, ensure that the site has been prepared according to
the description summarized in the Preparation overview section, and the Site-specic
documentation.
Horizon II mini installation sections

Outdoor enclosure installation comprises the sections listed in the following table:
Table 3-1 Installation sections

Section
Description
Weather conditions affecting unpacking,

installation or maintenance on page 3-6.
Information on how weather conditions can

affect unpacking and installation procedures.
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure delivery

and unpacking on page 3-8.
Information on delivery, packaging and how

to unpack the equipment.
Outdoor mounting options on page 3-13.
Describes the mounting options for the

outdoor enclosure.
Continued
3-2
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure components
Table 3-1 Installation sections (Continued)

Section
Description
Installing outdoor enclosure on a oor

mounting plinth on page 3-16.
Provides instructions for mounting the

outdoor enclosure on the oor.
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini outdoor

enclosure on page 3-22.
Describes the procedure for wall mounting

the outdoor enclosure.
Earthing and transient protection on page

3-30.
Details site earthing procedures, cabinet

internal earths and transient protection.
Installing the Horizon II mini in the outdoor

enclosure on page 3-33.
Details the installation of the Horizon II mini

indoor cabinet in the outdoor enclosure,
including: mechanical installation, earth
connection, RF connection, signal cable
connection, and power cabling connection.
Connecting input power on page 3-75.
Details the correct sequence for connection

to the external power source.
Installing the street furniture kit on page

3-77.
Detailed installation of optional street

furniture kit.
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure components

Figure 3-1 shows the main components of a fully equipped Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure,
with the HMS, doors and access panels removed for clarity.
68P02903W22-D
3-3
Dec 2007
E1 line testing
Figure 3-1 Fully equipped Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure
E1 line testing
If an E1 line has been provided, contact the local MSC and, at the earliest opportunity, arrange
to test the line back to the MSC.
3-4
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
All work must be carried out in accordance with the national and regional regulations applicable
at the installation site. The following acts and regulations apply for the United Kingdom:
Health and safety at work act, 1974.
Electricity at work regulations, 1989.
IEE regulations 16th Editions BS7671 (or IEC 364).
Personal protective equipment at work regulations, 1992.
Control of substances hazardous to health (COSHH) regulations.
Installation assumptions
All installation and commissioning procedures assume that they are being performed by
persons competent (In accordance with National, Regional and Local regulations) to install
and commission:
Electrical wiring installations, (AC and DC).
Horizon II mini equipment.
68P02903W22-D
3-5
Dec 2007
Weather conditions affecting unpacking, installation or maintenance

Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation
Chapter 3:
Weather conditions affecting unpacking, installation

or maintenance
Before beginning outdoor unpacking, installation or maintenance procedures, it is important

to read and take into account the following information concerning the climatic conditions
at the intended site.
Weather conditions
Due consideration should be given to the hazards of wind and other inclement weather
conditions when installing or maintaining outdoor equipment. This is especially
important when using a ladder to gain access.
Use discretion at all times.
Do not climb a ladder, scaffolding, or use some other similar method of access, if
you feel it is unsafe to do so under the prevailing weather conditions.
Do not attempt to open the enclosure doors if the wind speed exceeds 25 knots.
The equipment doors, and access panels must be safely restrained before work
is carried out.
Maintenance cover
Motorola recommend the use of a maintenance cover for access to the equipment during
inclement weather conditions.
The maintenance cover is not supplied with the outdoor equipment and should be
provided by the customer, if required.
Installation or maintenance procedures for the equipment are dependent on the weather
conditions. There are three situations where the recommended guidelines should be considered
before commencing work.
3-6
No access.
Access with maintenance cover.
Access without maintenance cover.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Maintenance cover
No access
Access should not be attempted to the enclosure during the following actual or imminent
inclement weather conditions, with or without a maintenance cover.
Winds in excess of 25 knots.
Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
During an electrical storm.
Access with a maintenance cover

Access may be made to the enclosure under the following conditions with the use of a
maintenance cover.
Wind speeds of less than 25 knots.
Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause a problem.
Access without a maintenance cover

Access may not be made under the following conditions without the use of a maintenance cover.
Wind speeds of less than 25 knots.
No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.
Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) are not a problem.
68P02903W22-D
3-7
Dec 2007
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure delivery and unpacking
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure delivery and

unpacking
This section provides information on delivery, packaging and how to unpack the equipment.
Before unpacking the equipment

Before the equipment arrives, installation personnel should designate an area at the site where
it can be unloaded. This area should also be suitable for unpacking the equipment. Consult with
the heavy freight or moving company and the owners of the site to select this area.
The equipment should be delivered to the site while still contained in its packaging.
This is to protect the cabinet from damage and moisture whilst in transit.
The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company, along with the
necessary moving dollies and padding. Use the dollies and padding to move the equipment from
the unloading area to the installation point.
Keep all paperwork that is attached to the packaging or found inside the equipment.
Safety requirements
The safety requirements for unpacking and handling the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure
are outlined in this section.
Observe the following safety precautions when handling Horizon II mini equipment:
3-8
Observe all safety and handling instructions on the packing boxes.
Where Horizon II mini components are heavy they should be installed using
lifting equipment, or with sufcient personnel available to ensure that regulations
covering Health and Safety are not breached.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Outdoor enclosure packaging crate
Handle cabinets, enclosures and racked components with extreme caution, and
in accordance with any National and Regional Health and Safety regulations.
Only competent persons (In accordance with local regulations) may work on this
equipment. It is imperative that only appropriately trained personnel be allowed
to install, commission, and maintain the equipment, or remove the protective
covers for any purpose.
Motorola recommends the use of slings in conjunction with hydraulic lift

apparatus for moving and positioning heavy equipment.
Unauthorized access to Horizon II mini equipment and associated cabinets must

be prevented. The Horizon II mini must only be installed in a location where
access by unauthorized personnel can be prevented, unless the optional, tamper
resistant, street furniture kit is tted.

Figure 3-2 depicts the construction of the shipping crate and how to open the packaging
to obtain the installation manual.
68P02903W22-D
3-9
Dec 2007
Figure 3-2
3-10
Typical outdoor enclosure shipping crate detail
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Equipment package units
Equipment package units

The following ancillary items required during installation are packed separately with the
enclosure:
External cable glands for power and communications cables.
Blanks for unused cable access holes.
Mounting Plinth.
8 mm Hex bit.
Optional equipment which may also be supplied separately is as follows:
Wall mounting kit.
Tamper resistant street furniture kit.
Anti-tamper SouthCo Trilobe bit.
Unpacking the crate, outdoor enclosure and plinth

The following describes the procedure for unpacking the equipment.
It is recommended that the installer reads through the following procedure

before starting to unpack and install the equipment.
Do not discard the carton lid at this stage, but put it aside safely as the drilling
template is printed on the inside.
Tool
Use the following tools to dismantle the crate and unpack the cabinet.
Box cutter or small knife.
68P02903W22-D
3-11
Dec 2007
Delivery and dismantling of the shipping crate
A Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure, (without the indoor cabinet), can weigh up to
46 kg. Observe proper lifting precautions in accordance with Health and Safety
regulations.
Figure 3-2 depicts the method to deliver and dismantle the shipping crate.
Care must be taken to avoid damaging the enclosure, especially by scratching the
outer surfaces.
Follow Procedure 3-1 to deliver and dismantle the shipping crate.
Procedure 3-1
1
Deliver the cabinet equipment to the site in its original packaging. Cut
the packaging tape.
The packing material used by Motorola is not returnable and

should be disposed of safely.
2
Lift the lid clear of the crate.
Lift out the foam protective pieces and lift the box over the cabinet.
Cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the enclosure.
Lift enclosure off the delivery pallet, over the foam packing pieces.
Remove the desiccant bag from the enclosure.
Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any
damage to the transport company.
Locate and retain the packet containing the oor mounting plinth, cables,
accessories and attachment screws.

The packing material used by Motorola is not returnable and should be disposed of safely or
retained, in case, they are needed to return the equipment for servicing, or to transport it
to another location.
3-12
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Outdoor mounting options
Outdoor mounting options
The outdoor enclosure may be:
Bolted to a plinth mounted on a separate concrete base of suitable size and construction to
accommodate the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure.
A steel structure may also be used, with size, construction and layout determined
by a structural engineer.
Bolted to a bracket mounted on an external wall or other strong vertical supportive

construction.
The two outdoor mounting options are as follows:
Figure 3-3 Floor mounting plinth on page 3-14.
Figure 3-4 Outdoor wall mounting bracket. (Cable cover not shown) on page 3-15.
Floor mounting
Figure 3-3 shows the mounting plinth used to mount the outdoor enclosure to a concrete base
or metal frame.
68P02903W22-D
3-13
Dec 2007
Outdoor wall mount
Figure 3-3 Floor mounting plinth
Cable entry for the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure is from the bottom. Appropriate
cable ducts must therefore be already in place.
Outdoor wall mount

Figure 3-4 shows the wall mounting bracket used to mount the outdoor enclosure to a wall
or strong supportive vertical construction.
3-14
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-4
68P02903W22-D
Outdoor wall mount
Outdoor wall mounting bracket. (Cable cover not shown)
3-15
Dec 2007
Installing outdoor enclosure on a oor mounting plinth
Installing outdoor enclosure on a oor mounting plinth
The Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure can be used with an optional plinth, onto which a
oor-standing enclosure is mounted. This plinth can be used on a smooth, level concrete oor,
or other strong supportive construction. The plinth ensures correct weight distribution, and
requires six M10 mounting or anchor bolts to secure it rmly in position.
The plinth is used as a drilling template. It is laid down on the concrete base and the position of
anchor mounting holes are marked. The plinth is then removed and holes are drilled into the
concrete in the positions marked for the enclosure mounting bolt anchors.
3-16
Mounting bolt anchors are not required, if the enclosure is to be mounted above
ground level, for example on a custom made support frame. In such cases,
the plinth is used to mark the drilling positions on the support frame for the
mounting bolts.
Cable entry for the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure is from the bottom,
appropriate cable ducts must be already in place.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
View of plinth
View of plinth
Figure 3-5 shows the position of the anchor bolt holes in the plinth when viewed from below.
Figure 3-5 Position of anchor bolt holes in plinth
Recommended bolt length for concrete oor

The recommended length of the M10 steel anchor bolts is 105 mm minimum.
Installing the oor mounting plinth

The concrete base must be drilled to accept M10 anchor bolts. Washers and bushes are
supplied, but the M10 steel bolts must be supplied by the customer.
Follow Procedure 3-2 for installing the M10 bolt anchors.
68P02903W22-D
3-17
Dec 2007
Installing the oor mounting plinth
Procedure 3-2 Installing the bolt anchors

1
Move the plinth to the selected mounting position, over the cable ducts.
Consider future as well as present space requirements. Ensure that the
plinth is in the correct orientation, (that is, with the six holes at the bottom
and the interface panel cut out at the top left).
Mark the position of the six anchor bolt holes in the bottom of the plinth on
the concrete base and move the plinth to a convenient location well away
from the mounting position.
Check that the distances between the pilot holes are correct (See Figure 3-5)
before starting the procedure to install the enclosure anchor bolts.
Drilling concrete ooring produces cement dust, which is

harmful to equipment and wiring.
Protect the enclosure and any nearby equipment from dust.

equipment.


concrete.
Drill out the six holes to a depth and clearance for the M10 bolt anchors
using a suitable drill bit.
5
Insert the bolt mounting anchors in the holes in the base.
Position the plinth over the mounting anchor holes.
Insert the M10 anchor bolts with the supplied bushes and washers, through
the plinth oor, to each anchor.
spirit level.
Continued
3-18
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Mounting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure
Procedure 3-2 Installing the bolt anchors (Continued)

9
When satised that the plinth is correctly aligned, torque the bolts to the
correct value.
values.

The outdoor enclosure is normally mounted without the Horizon II mini cabinet tted. The
doors, access panels and HMS may be removed prior to mounting to reduce the weight.
68P02903W22-D
When tted with a fully equipped Horizon II mini indoor cabinet the outdoor
enclosure can weigh up to 95 kg. Without the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
the outdoor enclosure weighs 46 kg.
Observe proper lifting precautions and handle each enclosure with extreme
caution to avoid tipping.
The Horizon II mini enclosure is heavy and should not be installed without the
use of lifting equipment unless sufcient personnel are available to ensure that
any National and Regional Health and Safety regulations are not breached.
3-19
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 3-3 to mount the outdoor enclosure onto the plinth.
Procedure 3-3 Mounting the outdoor enclosure on a oor standing plinth

1
Remove the front and rear access doors of the outdoor enclosure by
loosening the four captive screws at the corner of each door.
Fit a gasket protection bracket to the front and rear of the outdoor enclosure
as shown in Figure 3-6 using the two screws supplied.
Figure 3-6
Gasket protection bracket
Continued
3-20
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-3 Mounting the outdoor enclosure on a oor standing plinth (Continued)
3
A Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure, without the Horizon II

mini indoor cabinet, can weigh up to 46 kg.
Observe proper lifting precautions in accordance with Health

Lift and then lower the enclosure onto the plinth, ensuring that the mounting
holes in the enclosure base line up with those in the plinth, and the interface
panel lines up correctly with the cut out in the plinth upper rim.
4
Fit the four M8 securing bolts from below (See Figure 3-5). Tighten up the
anchor bolts to the correct torque, using a 13 mm socket.
Connect the site earth cable to the interface plate. (See Earthing and
transient protection on page 3-30 in this chapter).
Unscrew and remove the gasket protection bracket.
Ret the front and rear access doors of the outdoor enclosure by securing
with the four captive screws removed in step 1.
Mounting additional enclosures

At this stage multiple enclosures may be installed, depending on the site conguration.
68P02903W22-D
3-21
Dec 2007
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure
Wall mounting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure
Optionally, the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure can be installed on a vertical surface or wall
using the optional wall mount. The wall mount is not supplied with the cabinet and must be
ordered separately.
At the customer's discretion a vertical steel structure may also be used, with size,
construction and layout determined by a structural engineer. Reference should be
made to Horizon II mini physical specications on page 1-11 in this manual for details
of equipment weights and dimensions.
3-22
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-7 Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure positioned on the optional wall mount

The bolt length and type used to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is determined by a
structural survey performed by the site architect, but must be of sufcient strength to withstand
a maximum gross weight of 115 kgs.
68P02903W22-D
3-23
Dec 2007

The wall mount is supplied in ve parts, three of which must be assembled before installation.
The screws and washers required to assemble the wall mount and t the Horizon II
mini are contained within the packaging. Retain these until all mounting procedures
are completed.
Assembling the outdoor enclosure wall mount

Follow Procedure 3-4 to assemble the wall mounting bracket.
Procedure 3-4 Assembling the outdoor enclosure wall mount

1
Carefully unpack the wall mounting bracket, locate and retain the packet
of xing screws.
Retain the thin wall mounting plinth and the interface cover plate for later
use.
The interface cover plate should be retained until the cable

assemblies are connected to the enclosure.
3
3-24
Fit base support arms the to the upright as shown in Figure 3-8 using eight
M6 screws and eight washers, from the xing screws packet, previously
retained.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-8
68P02903W22-D
Assembling the outdoor wall mount
3-25
Dec 2007
Installing the outdoor wall mount
If installing in a location where access by unauthorized personnel cannot be prevented,

the optional, tamper resistant street furniture kit and the interface cover plate MUST
be tted.
Follow Procedure 3-5 to install the wall mount.
Procedure 3-5
Installing the outdoor wall mount
Using the Site specic installation plan locate a suitable position to mount
the equipment.
Using the outdoor wall mount as a template mark the position for the
six M10 mounting bolts. Mark the wall prior to tting the support arms
(Procedure 3-4), as it is easier at this stage.


equipment.


concrete.
Drill out the six holes to a depth and clearance for an M10 anchor bolt, and
t the mounting anchors to the holes in the wall.
4
Position the wall mount over the mounting anchor points.
to each anchor point.
spirit level.
Continued
3-26
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-5 Installing the outdoor wall mount (Continued)

7
When satised that the wall mount is correctly aligned, torque the bolts
to the correct value.
values.
This procedure assumes the equipment is being tted to a concrete wall. Other
vertical surfaces, such as steel frames, or non-concrete wall types requires the use of
The outdoor enclosure is normally mounted without the Horizon II mini cabinet tted, the doors,
access panels and HMS may be removed prior to mounting to reduce the weight.
When tted with a fully equipped Horizon II mini indoor cabinet the outdoor
enclosure can weigh up to 95 kg, without the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
the outdoor enclosure weighs 46 kg.
Observe proper lifting precautions and handle each enclosure with extreme
caution to avoid tipping.
The Horizon II mini enclosure is heavy and should not be installed without the
use of lifting equipment unless sufcient personnel are available to ensure that
any National and Regional Health and Safety regulations are not breached.
Follow Procedure 3-6 to mount the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure on the wall bracket.
Procedure 3-6
1
Fitting the outdoor enclosure to the wall mount
Remove the front and rear access doors of the outdoor enclosure by
loosening the four captive screws at the corner of each door.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
3-27
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-6 Fitting the outdoor enclosure to the wall mount (Continued)
2
Fit a gasket protection bracket to the front and rear of the outdoor enclosure
as shown in Figure 3-9 using the two screws supplied.
Figure 3-9
Gasket protection bracket
Locate the packet of xing screws retained in Procedure 3-4.
Fit the two large mushroom headed screws to the top two holes on the
back of the cabinet.
Fit the wall mounting plinth to the base of the outdoor enclosure with the
xing bolts provided.
Lift and then lower the enclosure onto the plinth, aligning the mushroom
headed screws in the two slots at the top rear of the wall mount. Ensure that
the mounting holes in the enclosure base line up with those in the plinth, and
the interface panel lines up correctly with the cut out in the plinth upper rim.
Fit the four M8 bolts, washers and spring washers from bottom. Tighten up
the anchor bolts to the correct torque.
Continued
3-28
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-6 Fitting the outdoor enclosure to the wall mount (Continued)
68P02903W22-D
Connect the site earth cable to the interface plate. (See Earthing and
transient protection on page 3-30, in this chapter).
Unscrew and remove the gasket protection bracket.
10
Ret the front and rear access doors of the outdoor enclosure by securing
with the four captive screws removed in step 1.
3-29
Dec 2007
This section summarizes general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to the Grounding
guidelines for cellular radio installations instructions, provided in Cellular system
engineering guide (68P81150E62), for detailed earthing information.
Each enclosure must be earthed separately. Enclosures must not be daisy chained
together.
3-30
The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point as its power
source).
Provision should be made for earthing the site before beginning the installation of the
enclosure (See Earthing an outdoor site on page 1-27).
A pair of M6 site earthing terminals (studs) is located on the bottom left of the enclosure
base, at the interface plate (See Figure 3-10 ). The studs are 25 mm apart to allow the
use of double hole connections.
Refer to the Site-specic documentation for detailed site earthing information.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
View of outdoor enclosure interface plate
View of outdoor enclosure interface plate
Figure 3-10 Outdoor enclosure interface plate viewed from below
68P02903W22-D
3-31
Dec 2007

All backhaul lines connected to Motorola equipment are provided with secondary transient
protection by the I/O boards. Ensure that the receive and transmit antenna connections to the
enclosure are fed through coaxial Electromagnetic Protection (EMP) devices.
The end user is responsible for primary transient protection of the backhaul lines
connected to Motorola equipment.
Connecting the site earth to the outdoor enclosure

The main site earth connection points are located on the bottom left of the enclosure base at the
interface plate. Twin M6 earthing studs are tted for double hole connection. The connection is
for site earthing, lightning protection and functional earthing of the enclosure.
Follow Procedure 3-7 to connect the site earth the enclosure.
Procedure 3-7 Connecting site earth to the outdoor enclosure

1
Connect the twin earth plate studs to the site earth using a 16 mm2
(minimum) cross-sectional area, sheathed, stranded conductor.
When using the optional wall mounting bracket, also connect the twin
M6 bonding studs on the wall mount to the site earth bar using a 16 mm2
(recommended) cross-sectional area, sheathed, stranded conductor.
The site earth is NOT the cabinet safety earth. See Installing cables and connecting
power for Safety Earth details for each power conguration.
3-32
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Installing the Horizon II mini in the outdoor enclosure
Installing the Horizon II mini in the outdoor enclosure
Installing the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet inside the outdoor enclosure is a complex
procedure comprising the following stages:
Disassembly of outdoor enclosure on page 3-33.
Fit power distribution module (if required) on page 3-37.
Mechanical installation of the indoor cabinet on page 3-40.
Connecting earth cabling (indoor cabinet to outdoor enclosure) on page 3-45.
Connecting RF cabling on page 3-45.
Connecting signal cabling on page 3-48.
Connect power cabling on page 3-61.
Reassembly of outdoor enclosure on page 3-71.
Disassembly of outdoor enclosure

Disassembly of the outdoor enclosure comprises of the following procedures.
Procedure 3-8 Removal of the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure doors on page 3-33.
Procedure 3-9 Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure HMS unit removal on page 3-34.
Follow Procedure 3-8 to open the door.
Procedure 3-8 Removal of the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure doors

1
Loosen the four captive screws at the corners of the door, using the SouthCo
Trilobe driver bit supplied with the outdoor enclosure.
Disconnect the earth bonding cable at the spade terminal and lift the door
away from the enclosure.
The procedure is the same for either doors.
68P02903W22-D
3-33
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 3-9 to remove the HMS.
Procedure 3-9 Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure HMS unit removal

1
Remove and retain the six SouthCo Trilobe fasteners, (three on each side)
securing the HMS access panel. Remove and carefully place the access
panel to one side.
Refer to Figure 3-11 and gain access to the fan control module through the
left door of the enclosure, and disconnect power cable (if tted).
Using the 8 mm hex bit supplied with the outdoor enclosure, unlock the four
draw latches securing the HMS to the enclosure as shown in Figure 3-12.
The HMS unit weighs 20 kg. Handle with care.
Carefully lift the HMS unit away from the enclosure an store safely for ret.
3-34
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-11
68P02903W22-D
HMS control module connections
3-35
Dec 2007
Figure 3-12 HMS unit latch operation
3-36
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Fit power distribution module (if required)

If the Horizon II mini indoor is ordered at the same time as the outdoor enclosure the power
distribution module is supplied tted and connected to the indoor cabinet.
The DC power distribution module is supplied with an auxiliary power cable attached
to the front face. This must be removed prior to installing the indoor cabinet into
the outdoor enclosure.
If the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure is ordered separately or as an upgrade, the power
distribution module must be tted before the indoor cabinet is installed in the outdoor
enclosure, as shown in Figure 3-13(AC) and Figure 3-14(DC).
68P02903W22-D
3-37
Dec 2007
Figure 3-13 Power distribution module
3-38
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-14 The outdoor enclosure DC distribution box
DC distribution
box
68P02903W22-D
3-39
Dec 2007
Mechanical installation of the indoor cabinet
Procedure for tting the power distribution module

Follow Procedure 3-10 to t the power distribution module.
Procedure 3-10 Fitting the power distribution module

1
Attach the power distribution module to the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet
using the four T20 Torx screws supplied with the power distribution module.
If tting a DC distribution module continue with Procedure 3-22. If tting

an AC distribution module connect the upper AC power output IEC 320
connector to the AC input recessed plug connector on the back panel (as
shown in Figure 3-13, on page 3-38).
The lower AC power output connector is used to power the fans in

the HMS unit.
3
Secure the connector in place using the cable clamp supplied with the
Horizon II mini.
equipment unless sufcient personnel are available to ensure that any National and
Regional Health and Safety regulations are not breached.
3-40
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-15 Horizon II mini indoor cabinet inside the outdoor enclosure (AC version
shown)
68P02903W22-D
3-41
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 3-11 to mount the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet in the outdoor enclosure.
Procedure 3-11 Fitting the Horizon II mini into the outdoor enclosure
Locate the three securing brackets, packaged with the outdoor enclosure.
A fully equipped Horizon II mini cabinet can weigh up to 46

kg.
Observe proper lifting precautions in accordance with Health

Carefully lift the Horizon II mini cabinet into the outdoor enclosure, with the
power distribution module facing outwards, (as shown in Figure 3-15).
3-42
Align the rear of the indoor cabinet with the stop at the rear left of the
outdoor enclosure, (as shown in Figure 3-17, on page 3-44).
Refer to Figure 3-16. Fit the two long, S shaped, securing brackets from
step 1 to secure the top of the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet, using a T20
Torx driver and tighten to a torque of 2.2 Nm.
Fit the short, L shaped, securing bracket from step 1 to secure the bottom
of the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet, using a T20 Torx driver and tighten to
a torque of 2.2 Nm.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-16 The two long S brackets and single short L bracket tted to the top
and bottom of the indoor cabinet
68P02903W22-D
3-43
Dec 2007
Figure 3-17 View of the rear of the Horizon II mini inside of the outdoor enclosure
3-44
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connecting earth cabling (indoor cabinet to outdoor enclosure)
Connecting earth cabling (indoor cabinet to outdoor enclosure)
indoor cabinet.
Do not make any input power connections at the main power source at this
time. Connecting input power on page 2-85 is the nal installation procedure in
this chapter.
Follow Procedure 3-12 to connect internal earth cables.
Procedure 3-12 Connecting internal earth path

Connect the earth cable between the spare earth stud on the Horizon II mini
back panel and the left hand earth stud on the inside of the interface panel
(See Figure 3-17, on page 3-44). Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
Connecting RF cabling
As shown in Figure 3-18, the interface plate has four cables tted with two N-type connectors
and two 7/16 connectors to enable antenna connection to the Mini-SURF module and duplexers.
68P02903W22-D
3-45
Dec 2007
Figure 3-18 Interface panel RF cabling
3-46
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 3-13 to connect the RF cables.
Procedure 3-13 Connecting RF cables

1
Connect the two cables with N-type connectors to the Mini-SURF module,
and the two with 7/16 connectors to the duplexers, in accordance with the
labelling on the inside of the interface panel.
Route the antenna feeder cables to the underside of the interface panel.
If using the wall mounting bracket, feed the external antenna

cables through the interface plate cover before tting connectors.
Fit the appropriately N-type RF connectors to the antenna cables, and label
the cables appropriately.
3
Connect the receive and duplex antenna cables to the interface panel
external N-type connectors, appropriate for the specic conguration of
the site.
For examples of RF congurations refer to the section on Suggested RF congurations on page
3-47 in Chapter 2 Horizon II mini cabinet indoor installation

Table 3-2 lists cable types used for Mini-SURF/Tx block interconnections.
Table 3-2 Mini-SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables
68P02903W22-D
Part number
Description
Use
3086970W01
Coaxial cable terminated at both end with

an SMA connector.
CTU2 to DUP
3086225N01
340 mm coaxial cable terminated at

either end with straight N-type plugs.
3087395T01

an N-type connector.
DUP to CMB
3087394T01

a N-type connector.
CTU2 to CMB
DUP to Mini-SURF
3-47
Dec 2007
Connecting signal cabling
RF connector torque settings

Table 3-3 lists the correct torque values for RF connectors.
Care should be taken when tightening SMA connectors to avoid damage by excess
force.
Table 3-3 Torque values for all RF connectors

Size of connector
SMA
N-Type
7/16
Torque value
(Nm)
1 Nm
3.4 Nm
25 Nm

This section describes the connection of all signal cables both external and internal to the
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure including:
3-48
Outdoor enclosure alarm cables.
Network backhaul E1 cables.
Optional GPS cables.
Customer specic equipment and alarm cables.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connecting outdoor enclosure alarms

The outdoor enclosure uses the external alarms connector are shown in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4
Pin
Numbers
External alarms pin connections (37-way D-type)

Signal/Description
Pin
Numbers
Signal/Description
Mains AC 1 fail *
20
Rectier 1 fail return *
Mains AC 1 fail return *
21
Rectier 2 fail *
PSU enable *
22
Rectier 2 fail return *
PSU enable return *
23
Aux HMS over temperature *
HMS 1 fail
24
Aux HMS over-temperature

return *
HMS 1 fail return
25
Door 2
HMS 2 fail *
26
Door 2 return
HMS 2 fail return *
27
Smoke *
Voltage trim return
28
Smoke return *
10
Voltage trim
29
Aux cabinet over-temperature

*
11
Not connected
30
Aux cabinet over-temperature

return *
12
Not connected
31
Not connected
13
Cabinet over-temperature 2 *
32
Not connected
14
Cabinet over-temperature
2 return *
33
Not connected
15
Low voltage
34
Not connected
16
Low voltage return
35
Not connected
17
Fan enable *
36
Cabinet over-temperature 1
18
Fan enable return *
37
Cabinet over-temperature
1 return
19
Rectier 1 fail *
* For alarms currently not used pins must be shorted together.
68P02903W22-D
3-49
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 3-14 to connect the outdoor enclosure alarm cable.
Procedure 3-14
1
Remove the shorting plug from the external alarms connector. Retain
the shorting plug, in a safe location, for use during redeployment or
decommissioning.
Connect the outdoor enclosure alarms cable to the external alarms

connector as shown in Figure 3-19 Outdoor enclosure alarms connector
on page 3-51.
Select one of the following:
3-50
Connecting the outdoor enclosure alarms
IF:
THEN...
The optional battery module is tted

to the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet.
Disconnect the 2 way mate and

lock connector on the outdoor
enclosure alarms cable to enable
the LVD1 alarm.
No battery module is tted.
Proceed to step 4.
Tighten the securing screws hand tight, using a slotted screwdriver.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-19 Outdoor enclosure alarms connector
68P02903W22-D
3-51
Dec 2007
Fitting cable glands to signal cables

Cable glands are used to provide a weather seal on all cables, except for antenna cables, entering
the outdoor enclosure. The following procedure is used to t cable glands to signal cables.
Follow Procedure 3-15 to t cable glands to signal cables.
Procedure 3-15
1
Fitting signal cable glands
Select suitably sized cable glands from those supplied with the enclosure.
Remove and retain the cable gland compression nut.
All holes in the RF plate must be sealed. If supplied glands have

too many holes a sealing blank must be used in which the required
number of holes must be drilled.
2
Remove the sealing blanks from the holes to be used and t the cable gland
from the inside.
Fit the compression nut loosely onto the signal cables and feed the cables
through the cable glands in the interface plate.
Make the internal connections to the appropriate equipment in the

enclosure. Refer to Connecting signal cabling on page 3-48.
Hand tighten the cable gland compression nuts.
Connecting network backhaul cables

All network backhaul signal and data connectors are located on the Horizon II mini indoor
cabinet back panel, as shown in Figure 3-20.
3-52
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-20 View of line interface module of Horizon II mini indoor cabinet in outdoor
enclosure. (Cables omitted for clarity)
68P02903W22-D
3-53
Dec 2007
To comply with North American safety regulations:
BIB/BIM twisted pair cables must be 26 AWG minimum.
T43/CIM Coaxial cable inner core must be 26 AWG minimum.
After passing the cables through the outdoor enclosure interface plate cable glands, as
described in Fitting cable glands to signal cables on page 3-52, connection is made using either:
A 37-pin D-type connector to both the BIB/BIM and the external PCM twisted pair circuit
lines. Figure 3-21, on page 3-54 shows a typical BIB/BIM and Table 3-5 on page 3-55
lists BIB/BIM interconnections.
A 37-pin D-type connector to the interconnect board and twelve type 43 coaxial connectors
to the external E1 circuit lines. Figure 3-22, on page 3-55 shows a typical T43/CIM, and
Table 3-6 lists the T43/CIM interconnections.
Figure 3-21 BIB/BIM
3-54
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Table 3-5
BIB/BIM interconnections
Pin
Pin
Equipment/Extension
Number
Number
Pin
Pin
Equipment/Extension
Number
Number
J0-1
Tx1 +
J1-1
J0-20
Tx1
J1-20
J0-2
Rx1 +
J1-2
J0-21
Rx1
J1-21
J0-4
Tx4 +
J1-4
J0-23
Tx4
J1-23
J0-5
Rx4 +
J1-5
J024
Rx4
J124
J0-7
Tx2 +
J1-7
J0-26
Tx2
J1-26
J0-8
Rx2 +
J1-8
J0-27
Rx2
J1-27
J0-10
Tx5 +
J1-10
J0-29
Tx5
J1-29
J0-11
Rx5 +
J1-11
J0-30
Rx5
J1-30
J0-13
Tx3 +
J1-13
J0-32
Tx3
J1-32
J0-14
Rx3 +
J1-14
J0-33
Rx3
J1-33
J0-16
Tx6 +
J1-16
J0-35
Tx6
J1-35
J0-17
Rx6 +
J1-17
J0-36
Rx6
J1-36
Connector J0 and J1 pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are
connected to earth.
Figure 3-22
68P02903W22-D
T43/CIM
3-55
Dec 2007
Table 3-6 T43/CIM interconnections

Pin
Number
Equipment/
Extension
Pin Number
J0-1
Tx1 +
J1 Centre
J0-2
Rx1 +
J0-4
Pin
Number
Equipment/
Extension
Pin Number
J0-20
Tx1
J1 Shield
J2 Centre
J0-21
Rx1
J2 Shield
Tx4 +
J4 Centre
J0-23
Tx4
J4 Shield
J0-5
Rx4 +
J5 Centre
J024
Rx4
J5 Shield
J0-7
Tx2 +
J7 Centre
J0-26
Tx2
J7 Shield
J0-8
Rx2 +
J8 Centre
J0-27
Rx2
J8 Shield
J0-10
Tx5 +
J10 Centre
J0-29
Tx5
J10 Shield
J0-11
Rx5 +
J11 Centre
J0-30
Rx5
J11 Shield
J0-13
Tx3 +
J13 Centre
J0-32
Tx3
J13 Shield
J0-14
Rx3 +
J14 Centre
J0-33
Rx3
J14 Shield
J0-16
Tx6 +
J16 Centre
J0-35
Tx6
J16 Shield
J0-17
Rx6 +
J17 Centre
J0-36
Rx6
J17 Shield
Connector J0 pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are not used.
Connecting expansion cabinet bre optic cables

Expansion cabinet bre optic cables are not connected directly to the back panel, but to the
site expansion board. The site expansion board is located in an integral well in the Horizon
II mini indoor cabinet back panel.
In an installation conguration with more than one Horizon II cabinet, bre optic connections
are used to link the site expansion board in the master cabinet to the site expansion board
in up to three expansion cabinets.
An additional site expansion board must be tted in each cabinet if redundancy is required
(determined by a redundant being installed in the master cabinet). This also requires that
redundant are installed in each slave cabinet.
Six different types of bre optic cable, colored orange and terminated with ST bre connectors,
are available for use. These are described in the Table 3-7.
Table 3-7
3-56
Expansion cabinet bre optic cables
Order number
Length
SVKN 5973
7 m
SVKN 5969
10 m
SVKN 5972
20 m
SVKN 5971
50 m
SVKN 6070
1000 m
Description
Connects master cabinet to expansion cabinet.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Do not look directly into a bre optic cable or the data in/out connectors of the site
expansion board, with or without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come
from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated bre optic cables connected to
data in/out connectors.
Follow Procedure 3-16 to connect bre optic cables between master and expansion cabinets
in multiple cabinet sites.
Procedure 3-16
1
Connecting bre optic cables
At the master cabinet, connect the push-t ST connectors of the bre optic
cables to the IN 0 and OUT 0 ports on the site expansion board (See
Figure 3-23, on page 3-58). Secure the cables in position by tting strain
relief clips to the handles of the site expansion board.
Do not use any tools, such as pliers, to connect ST bre

connectors, under any circumstances.
2
Pass the cables through the outdoor enclosure interface plate cable glands
as described in Fitting cable glands to signal cables on page 3-52.
Route the bre optic cables to the expansion cabinet, following existing
cable layout as far as possible.
Do not bend bres tighter than the minimum bend radius, under
any circumstances.
68P02903W22-D
At the expansion cabinet (slave), pass the cables through the outdoor
enclosure interface plate cable glands as described in Fitting cable glands to
signal cables on page 3-52, and connect the push-t ST connectors of the
bre optic cables to the OUT 0 and IN 0 ports on the site expansion board.
Secure the cables in position by tting strain relief clips to the handles
of the site expansion board.
Repeat step 1 to step 4 for additional expansion cabinets, connecting the

bre optic cables to ports 1 and 2 as required.
Once the bre optic cables are connected to the site expansion boards,
t strain relief clips to the handles of the site expansion board (shown in
Figure 3-23, on page 3-58) to secure the cables in position.
3-57
Dec 2007
Figure 3-23
Fibre optic connectors on the site expansion board
Connecting optional GPS cables

The GPS connector is an optional item that can be supplied already tted on the site expansion
board (See Figure 3-24, on page 3-59). The connector is a 15-way D-type.
3-58
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 3-24 GPS connector on site expansion board
Table 3-8 lists the GPS connector pinouts.
Table 3-8
GPS pin connections (15 way D-Type)
Pin
Number
Signal/Description
Pin
Signal/Description
Number
GPS power 1
GPS power 2
Not connected
10
Not connected
Chassis earth
11
PPS positive
Tx negative
12
PPS negative
Tx positive
13
Rx positive
Rx negative
14
VPP
Earth
15
GPS return 2
GPS return 1
Follow Procedure 3-17 to connect optional GPS cables.
Procedure 3-17
68P02903W22-D
Connecting optional GPS cables
Pass the cables through the outdoor enclosure interface plate cable glands
as described in Fitting cable glands to signal cables on page 3-52.
Connect the optional GPS cable to the site expansion board GPS connector.
Once the GPS cable is connected to the site expansion board, t strain relief
clips to the handles of the site expansion board (shown in Figure 3-24, on
page 3-59) to secure the cables in position.
3-59
Dec 2007
Connecting customer specic equipment and alarms

The PIX connector provides connection for external equipment and alarm sensors, the use of
which can be dened by the customer.
PIX outputs
PIX outputs comprise are switched by four relays, each controlled by the alarm board and
HIISC. The relays have multiple contacts, some normally open and some normally closed. The
contacts are rated for 1 A at 30 V. The contacts may be used to control external equipment such
as fans or audible alarms.
PIX inputs
PIX inputs comprise 16 connections from external sensors. These inputs report alarms to the
BSC, through the alarm board and HIISC. The BSC forwards the alarms to the OMC-R. The
end-user supplies the external sensors. Each sensor connects across an opto-coupled pair of PIX
inputs (eight per PIX connector).
Only 12 PIX inputs are available to the Horizon II mini, the other four are set high to
indicate to the network that this BTS is different cab type from Horizon II macro.
All sensors must be dry-contact type with the following specication:
5 kohm or greater across sense inputs for logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler off).
500 ohm or less across sense inputs for logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).
Customer specic alarms uses the PIX connector are shown in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9
PIX alarms pin connections (37-way D-type)
Pin
Numbers
Signal/Description
Pin
Numbers
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
10
Not connected
29
11
30
Signal/Description
Continued
3-60
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connect power cabling
Table 3-9 PIX alarms pin connections (37-way D-type) (Continued)

Pin
Numbers
Signal/Description
Pin
Numbers
12
31
13
32
14
33
15
34
16
35
17
36
Site input Extension

11-2
18
37
19
Signal/Description
Follow Procedure 3-18 to connect the customer specic equipment and alarms.
Procedure 3-18 Connecting customer specic equipment and alarms

1
Make up a 37-way connector, terminating the cables for customer specic

equipment and alarms.
Connect the customer specic equipment and alarms cable to the PIX
connector.

This section describes the procedure for connecting power and earth cabling to the outdoor
enclosure.
indoor cabinet.
Do not daisy chain cabinet earths together.
Cabinets must be earthed with a conductor equal to or larger than the supply
power cables, and capable of carrying the full fault current of the over-current
protection device.
Do not make input power connections at the main power source at this time.
Connecting input power on page 2-85 is the nal installation procedure in this
chapter.
Power specications can be found in Suggested RF congurations on page 2-36.
68P02903W22-D
3-61
Dec 2007
Cable routing
To prevent damage to the equipment:
Ensure that covers are tted to any unused connectors on the cabinet interface
panel; the covers protect the connectors from damage by static electricity or
foreign matter.
Do not make DC input power connections at the main DC power source at this
time.
The external converter supplying power to the cabinet must have double or
reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits.
The external converter that supplies power to the cabinet must meet safety
standard IEC 60950.
An adequate means should be provided for routing cables from the main power source to the
equipment, such as a cable trough or conduit.
The current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service is affected by all of

the following factors (Reference IEC 364):
3-62
Ambient temperature
Grouping
Partial or total enclosure in thermal insulating material
Frequency (AC only)
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Enclosure site earthing and ESP connection points

The main earth connection point is at twin 10 mm M6 threaded studs on the interface panel (See
Figure 3-25. This connection is for protective earthing and functional earthing of the enclosure.
Follow Procedure 3-19 to connect the site earth.
Procedure 3-19
Connecting outdoor enclosure site earth

cabinets together.
Route the earth wire from the site master earth and connect to the outdoor
enclosure earth studs on the interface panel (See Figure 3-25, on page
3-64). Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
68P02903W22-D
3-63
Dec 2007
Figure 3-25 Outdoor enclosure interface panel
Additional internal earths are:
3-64
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Doors to enclosure frame.
Enclosure frame to interface panel.
Interface panel to Horizon II mini indoor cabinet back panel.
Horizon II mini indoor cabinet back panel AC connector.
Power distribution module AC connectors.
Power distribution module main earth point.
HMS control module AC connectors.
observed:
To ensure a complete primary earth path the earth cable must be connected to
National and Regional wiring regulations.

competent persons. (In accordance with local regulations) may work on this
equipment.

Power supply cable color coding
Ensure that the PSU tted correctly matches the supply source voltage.
This section describes the most commonly used color coding schemes for power supply cables.
Motorola recommends conformance with these standards.
68P02903W22-D
3-65
Dec 2007
Single phase AC
For single phase AC connections:
The line power cable is brown or red.
The neutral cable is blue or black.
The earth cable is green or green and yellow.
Fitting cable glands to power supply cables

Cable glands are used to provide a weather seal on all cables entering the outdoor enclosure. A
20 mm cable gland is provided which accepts standard round jacketed cables of between 7 mm
and 13 mm external diameter. Alternative styles, such as armoured cables, may be used but a
suitable cable gland must be used to maintain the integrity of the cabinet sealing. The following
procedure is used to t cable glands to power supply cables.
Follow Procedure 3-20 to t cable glands to power supply cables.
Procedure 3-20 Fitting power supply cable glands

1
Locate the supplied M20 cable gland. Remove the compression nut,
securing nut and tab washer.
Fit the exible boot over the cable sheathing and slide back away from the
cable gland, so that it is ready to be tted over cable gland once the gland
has been tted to the interface plate.
Fit the compression nut over the cable sheathing.
Measure the length of cable required to reach from the interface plate to
the cable destination.
Feed the length of cable measured in step 4 through the cable gland.
Fit the cable gland to the cable, over the cable sheathing.
Secure the compression nut to the cable gland and t the inner sheath and
cable gland through the hole in the interface plate.
Secure the cable gland with the locknut and slide the exible boot over the
cable gland assembly. Hand tighten the cable gland compression nuts.
If the M20 cable gland is not suitable for the AC supply cable, a suitable alternative
must be supplied by the customer for the installation team.
Horizon II mini cabinet AC connection procedure

The single phase AC input is fed to a terminal block inside the power distribution module. It
is then distributed by two AC supply cables, each terminated with a standard type IEC320
connector, to the Horizon II mini indoor cabinet and the HMS fan control unit.
3-66
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 3-21 to connect AC power cables to a single phase cabinet in an outdoor
enclosure.
Procedure 3-21 Outdoor enclosure single phase AC cabling procedure

1

cabinets together.
Ensure that the earth wire from the outdoor enclosure master earth is
connected to the main cabinet earth stud on the back panel. (Refer to
Connecting earth cabling (indoor cabinet to outdoor enclosure) on page
3-45).
2
For connection to AC supply, use protective device and

appropriately rated cable, selected in accordance with
The protective earth connection is made at the earth terminal

of the primary AC terminal block.
To ensure the integrity of protective earthing the main earth

cable must be permanently connected to the site master
earth.
Pass the power supply cable through the interface panel to the power
distribution module using the appropriately sized cable gland. To t cable
gland see Fitting cable glands to power supply cables on page 3-66.
3
Remove the power distribution module access panel, using a slotted

screwdriver. Retain the screws and panel for later use.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
3-67
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-21 Outdoor enclosure single phase AC cabling procedure (Continued)

4

voltages. Only competent persons (In accordance with local
Feed the cable to the terminal block through the cable gland on
the side of the power distribution module and connect as shown
in Figure 3-26, on page 3-69. Secure the cable to the AC power
distribution module structure using a cable tie.
5

Route AC cable to the main AC power source.

6
Ret the power distribution module access panel, using the screws
previously retained. Using a slotted screwdriver tighten to a torque of 2.2
Nm.
Hand tighten the cable gland compression nuts on the power distribution
module and the outdoor enclosure interface panel, to provide a weather
proof seal.
The single phase AC power cable connection procedure is now complete.
3-68
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Horizon II mini cabinet DC connection procedure
Figure 3-26 Primary AC terminal block, (shown with terminal cover removed)

Perform the following steps to complete the DC connection procedure.
68P02903W22-D
3-69
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-22 Horizon II mini cabinet DC connection procedure

1

cabinets together.
Ensure that the earth wire from the outdoor enclosure master earth is
connected to the main cabinet earth stud on the back panel. (Refer to
Connecting earth cabling (indoor cabinet to outdoor enclosure) on page 3-45).
2
Connect the earth from the DC power distribution box to the earth stud on the
outdoor enclosure interface panel.
Figure 3-27
Earth connections
Route the DC cables from the DC power source through the power glands on
the outdoor enclosure interface panel and connect it to the DC connector
block on the indoor back panel. Refer Figure 3-28.
Continued
3-70
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Reassembly of outdoor enclosure
Procedure 3-22 Horizon II mini cabinet DC connection procedure (Continued)

4
Connect the positive and negative ring terminals from the DC power
distribution box to the DC connector block on the indoor back panel.
Figure 3-28
Power terminals

Reassembly of the outdoor enclosure comprises of the following procedures:
Procedure 3-23Retting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure HMS unit on page 3-71.
Procedure 3-24Retting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure doors on page 3-73.
Follow Procedure 3-23 to ret the HMS.
Procedure 3-23 Retting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure HMS unit
1
Reposition the HMS unit in the front of the outdoor enclosure.
Using the 8 mm hex bit supplied with the outdoor enclosure, lock the four
draw latches securing the HMS to the enclosure.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
3-71
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-23
3
Retting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure HMS unit (Continued)
Reconnect the power cable to the HMS control module.
Figure 3-29 AC power lead
Continued
3-72
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-23
Retting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure HMS unit (Continued)
Figure 3-30 DC HMS control module lead
Ret the HMS access panel, using the six SouthCo trilobe fasteners retained
in Procedure 3-23.
Follow Procedure 3-24 to ret the door.
Procedure 3-24 Retting the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure doors

1
Hold the door at about 45 in open position and lift bottom into position.
Reconnect the earth bonding cable at the spade terminal.
Shut the door by pressing the top of the door and secure with the four
captive screws at the corners of the door, using the SouthCo Trilobe driver
bit, supplied with the outdoor enclosure.
For a wall mounted installation, t the cable cover.
The procedure is the same for both doors.
68P02903W22-D
3-73
Dec 2007
Follow Procedure 3-25 to ret the cable cover.
Procedure 3-25 Retting the cable cover

Fit the cable cover with the screws provided.
3-74
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Connecting input power comprises of the following:
Pre-connection checks.
Connecting previously installed power cables (either AC or DC), to the building or site
power source.
Preconnection checks
At this point of the installation process, ensure that the pre-connection checks are performed.
The equipment is not already connected to the main AC or DC power source.
The equipment is connected to the AC or DC power cabling.
PSUs in the equipment are the correct type for the voltage selected.
observed:
68P02903W22-D

competent persons. (In accordance with local regulations) may work on this
equipment.

3-75
Dec 2007
Connecting power
Connecting power
Ensure that the power supply input has been safely isolated, so that there is no risk of
power being applied to the cable during this procedure. The source should be isolated
and locked, and warning label attached.
Follow Procedure 3-26 to connect power to the equipment.
Procedure 3-26 Connecting power

1
Isolate the power source and lock the isolator switch.
Route and secure the power cable from the equipment to the building or
site power supply.

voltages. Only competent persons in accordance, with local
Connect the power cable to the building power supply.

4
Unlock the isolator switch.
3-76
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Installing the street furniture kit
Unauthorized access to Horizon II mini equipment and associated cabinets must be prevented.
If the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure is installed in a location where access by unauthorized
personnel cannot be prevented, the optional, tamper resistant, street furniture kit (shown in
Figure 3-31) must be tted.
In the U.K. the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure with optional Southco Tri-lobe
xings is compliant with safety requirements IEC 60950 and is classied as street
located equipment not street furniture in accordance with the 16th Edition IEE
BS7671:2001 denitions.
68P02903W22-D
3-77
Dec 2007
Figure 3-31
3-78
Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure with street furniture kit
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Fitting the street furniture kit
Fitting the street furniture kit

Follow Procedure 3-27 to t the street furniture kit.
Procedure 3-27 Fitting the street furniture kit
68P02903W22-D
Remove and retain the HMS access panel by removing the six SouthCo
Trilobe fasteners.
Fit the tamper resistant front cover, using the six SouthCo Tri-lobe fasteners,
previously retained. Tighten to 34 Nm, using the SouthCo Trilobe bit
supplied with the street furniture kit.
Fit the tamper resistant lid, using four SouthCo Tri-lobe fasteners. Tighten to
34 Nm, using the SouthCo Trilobe bit supplied with the street furniture kit.
3-79
Dec 2007
DC outdoor mini upgrade procedure
Follow Procedure 3-29 to upgrade the Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure from AC to DC.
Procedure 3-28
Removal of the AC items
Remove the AC HMS unit.

Remove and retain the six SouthCo Trilobe fasteners, (three on each side) as
shown in Figure 3-32 securing the HMS access panel. Remove and
carefully place the access panel to one side.
Figure 3-32
HMS access panel
Remove the rear access panel to gain access to the fan control module. Refer
Figure 3-32.
Continued
3-80
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-28
3
Removal of the AC items (Continued)
Disconnect the fan control module AC power cable from the power inlet (see
Figure 3-33).
Figure 3-33
Fan control module connection
POWER INLET
(From AC
DISTRIBUTION
MODULE)
ti-GSM-Horizon II mini W21-00075-eps-sw
Continued
68P02903W22-D
3-81
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-28
The HMS unit weighs 20 kg. Handle with care.

Use 8 mm hex bit supplied with the outdoor enclosure to unlock the four draw
latches securing the HMS to the enclosure and carefully lift the HMS unit
away from the enclosure. Store the HMS unit safely for ret.
Figure 3-34 HMS unit latch operation
Continued
3-82
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-28
Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources are present in

the cabinet when the external ac mains isolator switch is set to the
ON position and/or batteries are connected. Stored energy may
remain present in the cabinet when external power is not connected:
Remove rings, watches and jewellery before starting these

procedures, and exercise extreme caution when working on
the equipment.
Maintenance procedures on this equipment must only be

carried out by suitably qualied personnel.
Figure 3-35 Primary AC terminal block (shown with terminal cover

removed)
Continued
68P02903W22-D
3-83
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-28
Ensure that the AC power source is turned off and remove the small square
AC terminal cover from the AC power distribution box. The AC power lead
then needs to be disconnected from the terminal block and removed from the
outdoor enclosure. See Figure 3-35.
6
Remove the AC power output IEC 320 connector from the AC input recessed
plug connector on the back panel of the indoor cabinet.
Remove the AC power distribution box by undoing the four screws that secure
it in position.
Remove the AC indoor PSUs if this procedure is being carried out as a

eld upgrade. Follow Steps 1-3 of the Replacing a Power Supply unit
procedure in the FRU chapter of the Service manual.
Procedure 3-29
Installing the DC items
Ensure that the -48 V DC power source is switched off before starting the procedure.
1
Fit the DC power distribution box. Secure it with the four M4 x 6mm screws it
came supplied with.
Connect the earth from the DC power distribution box to the earth stud on the
outdoor enclosure interface panel.
Figure 3-36
Earth connections
Continued
3-84
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-29
Installing the DC items (Continued)
Route the DC cables from the DC power source through the power glands on
the outdoor enclosure interface panel and connect it to the DC connector
block on the indoor back panel. Refer Figure 3-28.
Connect the positive and negative ring terminals from the DC power
distribution box to the DC connector block on the indoor back panel.
Figure 3-37
Power terminals
Fit the new DC HMS.

Position the DC HMS unit in front of the outdoor enclosure. Using the 8 mm
hex bit, supplied with the outdoor enclosure, lock the four draw
latches securing the HMS to the enclosure.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
3-85
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-29
6
Connect the lead from the DC HMS control module to the DC power
distribution box.
Figure 3-38
DC HMS control connection
Ret the HMS access panel, using the six SouthCo Trilobe fasteners retained
in step 1 of Procedure 3-28 (tighten using the SouthCo Trilobe driver bit
supplied with the outdoor enclosure).
Fit the replacement -48 V DC indoor PSUs if this procedure is being carried
out as a eld upgrade. Follow Steps 4-6 of the Replacing a Power Supply
unit procedure in the FRU chapter of the Service manual.
Continued
3-86
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-29
9
Attach the supplied DC label over the AC section of the BTS identication
label on the backplane of the unit.
Figure 3-39
Previous label
Continued
68P02903W22-D
3-87
Dec 2007
Procedure 3-29
Figure 3-40
10
3-88
New label
Ret the rear access panel removed in step 2 of Procedure 3-28.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Chapter
4
Horizon II mini interoperability
This chapter describes how the Horizon II mini can be used in conjunction with other Motorola
BTS products.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
4-1
Introduction to interoperability
Introduction to interoperability
Different Motorola product types can be collocated at the same physical site without restriction,
provided they are congured as logically separate installations, and in accordance with the
normal product engineering rules.
Mixed product sites

When mixed product types are installed at the same logical site, a number of technical issues
arise that restrict the hardware that can be congured, and the way it is interfaced. This section
explains which product types can be mixed in this way, and how they are interfaced.
Architectural constraints
To enable different product types to be used at the same logical site, one product type is
chosen as master, which is connected to the extender equipment so that the two product types
can function as a single, logical BTS. This approach is viable when the product types to be
interfaced have similar architecture.
Motorola BTS product types that can be interfaced for collocation at a single logical site are
therefore restricted to those shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1
BTS compatibility for collocation at a single logical site
Master
Extender
InCell
M-Cell2
M-Cell6
Horizon
macro
Horizon
II macro
Horizon
II mini
Horizon
II micro
Other
micro
products
InCell
N/A
No
No
No
No
No
No
N/A
M-Cell2
No
Yes*
Yes*
No
No
No
No
N/A
M-Cell6
No
No
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Horizonmacro No
No
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
No
No
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Horizon
II mini
No
No
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Horizon II
No
No
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
Yes
Horizon II
macro
micro
Other
micro
products
* Check for availability before ordering.

Horizon II mini and Horizon II micro are not recommended as a masters in a mixed site,
since there is no redundancy.
4-2
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Architectural constraints
Indoor and outdoor BTSs can be mixed, but different mechanical arrangements may be required
for routing the inter-BTS cabling.
68P02903W22-D
4-3
Dec 2007
BTS architecture and inter-operability
BTS architecture and inter-operability
This section describes the architecture of the different generations of Motorola BTS and how
they can be connected together as a functional site. Throughout this section the term Horizon II
BTS is used to indicate either Horizon II macro or Horizon II mini.
Inter-operability - Points to consider

When a Horizon macro or MCell6BTS is used as a master with Horizon II BTS as a slave, the
following requirements are mandatory:
GSR6 (Horizon II), or later, software is required.
A 20 Mbyte PCMCIA memory card running CSFP must be installed in the MCUF in the
Horizon macro or the MCU in the MCell6 to accommodate the use of the CTU2 transceiver
from a code storage standpoint. If the BTS is equipped with a redundant MCUF or MCU,
the PCMCIA card is mandatory for this also.
For MCell6, an FMUX is required in order to communicate with the Horizon II BTS.
When operating a Horizon II mini as a slave from a macro that supports redundancy,
(Horizon II macro, Horizon macro, or MCell6), an alarm is generated as the Horizon II
mini does not support redundancy.
When operating a Horizon II mini as a master or slave BTS, the conguration cannot be
split cell.
Horizon II BTS, Horizon macro and MCell6 architecture

Figure 4-1, on page 4-5 represents the high level architecture of the Horizon II mini, Horizon
II macro, Horizon macro and MCell6 BTSs. All three systems provide an optical interface for
connection to remote transceivers, which in a normal installation would be used to connect to
transceivers of the same product type.
However, since the optical interface is identical for all four products, it can be used to link a
Horizon II macro and/or Horizon II mini to Horizon macro and/or MCell6 transceivers. The
principle is shown in Figure 4-2.
4-4
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Figure 4-1 High level architecture of Horizon II BTS, Horizon macro and MCell6
68P02903W22-D
4-5
Dec 2007
Figure 4-2
4-6
Examples of interfacing different products at a single logical site
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Example mixed site
When two product types are interfaced in this way, the control function for the entire site is
implemented by the master BTS. In Figure 4-2, this is the Horizon II BTS or the MCell6. In
practice, any Horizon II macro, Horizon II mini, Horizon macro or MCell6 BTS can be congured
as master, depending on the needs of the network concerned.
Example mixed site

A multi- cabinet mixed site can typically be achieved in several ways. Figure 4-3 shows some
(but not all ) alternative layouts for a mixed BTS site.
Figure 4-3 Example of alternative layouts for a mixed BTS site
The maximum number of carriers for a single mixed BTS site is 24.
68P02903W22-D
4-7
Dec 2007
Technical issues
Technical issues
When mixing different BTS types, the interface may be required to resolve some or all of the
following issues, depending on the site conguration:
The interface must deliver both Rx and Rxdiv (receive diversity) signals to each transceiver.
The interface must not change the uplink (receive) signal level delivered to any transceiver.
The interface must ensure that in the mixed BTS conguration, RF combiners remain
correctly loaded.
There is a limitation when connecting a Horizon II mini to any other equipment, the
Mini-SURF does not have expansion ports and cannot therefore be connected to the
SURF2 of a Horizon II macro or the SURF of a Horizon macro. This prohibits the choice of
split cell congurations.
There is a limitation when connecting a SURF2 (Horizon II macro) to a SURF (Horizon

macro). The SURF2 main branch (A) does not include any internal Rx band lters.
Therefore, Rx connections from a Horizon macro cabinet to the main branch of the SURF2
must be through a Horizon macro Rx path that includes a duplexer and the SURF so that
Rx ltering can be performed (in the SURF).
Receive path
When a cell is wholly congured within one cabinet, there is no requirement to connect the
uplink or downlink RF signals between the master and slave cabinets. The only interface
between the cabinets in this type of mixed BTS conguration is therefore at digital level,
between XMUXs and/or FMUXs through the bre optic link.
When a cell is split between two cabinets, the uplink signals must be connected between the
cabinets since both Rx and Rxdiv signals are required at each transceiver. In this situation, the
downlink signal may or may not require connection between cabinets, depending on the site
conguration.
Because the Mini SURF does not have expansion ports, the Horizon II mini does not
enable Rx signals to be transferred between cabinets. Split cell is not therefore
possible with Horizon II mini congurations.
The uplink connectivity requirements between different cabinets for GSM1800 and GSM900
are described on the following pages.
Transmit path
This section contains examples of transmit path combining for:
4-8
Horizon II mini combining.
Mixed equipment combining.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Transmit path
Horizon II mini combining

The only conguration currently supported that uses combining is the bow tie. Figure 4-4 shows
a suggested conguration, using one Horizon II mini cabinet, for omni 2 or 4 with two duplexers
and hybrid combining in a bow tie arrangement.
Figure 4-4 Single cabinet, omni 2 or 4 with two DUP and CMB in bow tie
68P02903W22-D
4-9
Dec 2007
Transmit path
This conguration is particularly useful for long, narrow ribbon cells. Its advantage over
a sectored site is that no hand-over is required when a subscriber moves from one side of
the BTS to the other. Its advantage over an omni-directional site is that antenna gain can be
used to increase the effective length of the cell. Figure 4-5 shows a functional diagram of this
conguration with a representation of the approximate antenna spread pattern.
Diversity must be software enabled for bow tie conguration, even though sector
antennas not using diversity.
4-10
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Transmit path
Figure 4-5 Bow tie conguration
68P02903W22-D
4-11
Dec 2007
Hardware equivalents for different BTS types
Hardware equivalents for different BTS types

Table 4-2 shows the RF hardware equivalents for the Horizon II macro, Horizon II mini, Horizon
macro and MCell6 BTSs.
Table 4-2 RF hardware equivalents for Horizon II mini, Horizon II macro, Horizon
macro and MCell6
Horizon II mini
900/1800
Horizon II macro
900/1800
Horizon macro
900/1800
DUP
DUP
PGSM
duplexer
MCell6 900
MCell6 1800
(No
equivalent)
Duplexer
Duplexer
PGSM
duplexer
(No
equivalent)
(No
equivalent)
(No
equivalent)
CMB
HCU
(No
equivalent)
Hybrid
Hybrid
(No
equivalent)
DHU
(No
equivalent)
3-input CBF*
3-input CBF*
(No
equivalent)
Feedthrough
plate
Feedthrough
plate
Non-hybrid
(no equivalent)
(No direct
equivalent)
Bow tie
conguration
HCU + DUP
DCF
CBF +
duplexer
Hybrid +
duplexer
(No
equivalent)
DHU + DUP
DDF
3-input CBF*
+ duplexer
2 X hybrid +
dup/BPF
2 X DUP
2 X DUP
TDF
TBF +
duplexer
2 X dup/BPF
(No
equivalent)
(No
equivalent)
Dual band TDF
(No
equivalent)
(No
equivalent)
Mini-SURF
SURF2
SURF
3 X DLNB +
IADU
3 X LNA
(No
equivalent)
Split sector
cable
Split sector
cable
Rx extender
(No
equivalent)
* 3-input CBF contains only one internal 50 ohm load.
Further conguration information

Provided the functional guidelines described in this chapter are followed, the steps involved in
upgrading an existing site with mixed equipment are essentially the same as with a conventional
upgrade:
4-12
Determine the number of additional carriers required in the upgraded site.
Based on the required site conguration (For example, 4/4/4), use the functional guidelines
provided in this chapter to decide the most effective hardware conguration for the
additional cabinet(s).
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Special hardware for mixed cabinet congurations
Special upgrade kits are available for specied congurations.
Conguration diagrams and product ordering help are available from the Motorola local
ofce.

A range of cables is available for uplink, downlink and bre optic connections, together with the
uplink attenuators described earlier. Contact the Motorola local ofce for further details.
In addition, the mounting plate and snap-in multi cable gland shown in Figure 4-6 are required
when expanding MCell6 outdoor cabinets with Horizon II BTSs or Horizon macro cabinets. In
this type of conguration, the Horizon II BTS or Horizon macro equipment is located to the
left of the MCell6 cabinets.
Figure 4-6 Special cable gland plate required for mixed MCell6 and Horizon II BTS,
or Horizon macro installations
68P02903W22-D
4-13
Dec 2007
The mounting plate is located as shown in Figure 4-7 in place of the original blanking plate
tted to the MCell6.
Figure 4-7
4-14
Location of the snap-in multi cable gland and mounting plate in the MCell6
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Chapter
5
Commissioning the Horizon II mini
This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of a cabinet and its internal
and external interfaces.
Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola, including battery
chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer to Site-specic documentation and
the Non-Motorola vendor instructions.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
5-1
Commissioning overview and test equipment
Commissioning overview and test equipment
All site preparation and equipment installation described in previous chapters must be
completed before commissioning. Commissioning consists of the following:
Pre-power up checks.
Powering up the enclosure.
VSWR check.
Checking and changing the max_tx_bts parameter.
Test equipment
Table 5-1 provides details of the test equipment required to perform the commissioning
procedures in this chapter.
Table 5-1 Test equipment required for commissioning

Description
Quantity
1
5-2
IBM compatible portable Personal

Computer
Comments
With:
PCMCIA Type 2 slot
Serial comms port
Battery power
Commercial terminal emulator

software
PC PLUS or similar software (suitable

for PC being used).
Digital multimeter (must be sensitive

enough to measure 0.05 ohms)
Hewlett Packard E2378A or equivalent.
ESD protection kit
9-way male D-type to 9-way female

D-type adaptor
Compatible with PC to TTY

port on CTU2 and HIISC.
Pin connections shown in Figure 5-1.
PAT tester
Insulation and earth tester.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Test leads required
Test leads required

Figure 5-1 shows the pin connections for the PC to HIISC test cable. These are standard null
modem pin connections. There is also a TTY adaptor to attach to the cable for CTU2 use
(Motorola part number 58C86540N01).
Figure 5-1
Horizon II 9-way to 9-way hardware verication cable connections
Test equipment and test lead calibration

To minimize variations in test results, ensure that all appropriate equipment and test leads used
in hardware verication procedures are calibrated.
Out of calibration test equipment may damage equipment or degrade hardware

performance. To prevent this the following points should be adhered to:
68P02903W22-D
A recognized laboratory must calibrate all test equipment and associated test
leads annually.
Do not calibrate test equipment or test leads in the eld.
5-3
Dec 2007
Pre-power up checks
Pre-power up checks
This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applying power to the
equipment, and safety precautions to be complied with during all commissioning procedures.
Safety during commissioning

Observe the following warnings and cautions during commissioning of the equipment:
5-4
The power system checks provided in this section must be performed before
powering up the equipment.
Potentially hazardous ac voltages or high energy dc voltages are present within

the enclosure, when the equipment is directly connected to a power supply.
Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning of the ac and dc power
system, and watches and other jewelry should be removed.
Only insulated tools should be used.
This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerable to static discharge.

Although the damage may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be
damaged in the long term due to mishandling causing barrier breakdown.
The approved earth strap (high impedance) must be worn at all times when
adjusting or handling the processor cards (but see WARNING above, regarding
use of earth straps).
If the cooling is compromised, (for example if an enclosure door is kept open for
long periods of time), during commissioning, an alternative method of cooling
must be provided to avoid damage to the equipment through overheating.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS7671 (16th Edition<Section 712>)
or the IEC 364 equivalent.
If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, commissioning must not proceed
further until the damage has been inspected and rectied by the manufacturers or
their representatives.
Exterior inspection Examine the exterior of the equipment for structural, paint or
mechanical damage and report any damage to Motorola.
Interior inspection Examine the interior of the equipment for structural, paint or
mechanical damage and report any damage to Motorola.
Power equipment Examine the power equipment for mechanical damage and report
any damage to Motorola.
Request for power supply connection

Ensure that all correct Request for connection and Completion and inspection form
certicates have been sent to the local electricity supplier.
Samples of a typical Request for connection and a Completion and inspection

form are shown in the nal pages of this chapter.
Earth continuity check

Ensure that an earth continuity check has been performed on appropriate equipment, if
required. Use the digital multimeter to check that the resistance of the test equipment leads is
less than 0.05 ohm.
68P02903W22-D
5-5
Dec 2007
System insulation check for ac power
Main equipment earths Connect the PAT tester to the earth terminal and to the following
earth points:
Antenna feeders.
Power supply input earth.

The local electricity board termination point.
Power supply distribution board.
Power supply isolator.
The switched isolator will not be connected to earth if it is a double

insulated device and will therefore not require testing.
Equipment chassis (all units).
Power supply unit chassis.
Rack members.
Check that the measured resistance is less than 0.1 ohm with the tester connected to a
conductive surface (bare metal) at extreme ends of the earth cables.
On completion of each earth check apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to the earth
connections on the earth bar.
System insulation check for ac power

Ensure that an insulation check has been performed on all ac power cables which supply the site
up to the ac input to the enclosure. Testing must be carried out in accordance with the BS7671
(16th Edition <section 713-04-01 to 713-04-06>) or IEC 364 equivalent, at the voltage levels
shown in Table 5-2, using an approved insulation tester. Check that the insulation resistance at
each point is as shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 BS7671 (16th edition) Table 71A (part of)

Parameter
Up to and including 500 V
Test voltage (ac volts)
Minimum insulation (megohms)
500
0.5
When the test has been completed, sign the completion and inspection certicate, a sample of
which may be found in the nal pages of this chapter.
5-6
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Powering up the cabinet
Powering up the cabinet
This procedure assumes all previous procedures have been completed.
Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning of the power system,
and watches and other jewelry should be removed.
Only insulated tools should be used.
The power source must be supplied to the equipment using a suitable over
current protective device and be isolated from the BTS.
Mismatch of PSUs to supply voltage causes damage to the PSU and/or the
equipment.
Blocking the ventilation inlet or exhaust causes the equipment to overheat,

resulting in shutdown, and possible damage to the equipment.
Power up procedure without code load

The following procedure should be carried out to power up the cabinet, with no code load. This
proves the cabinet hardware is capable of operation. The procedure for cabinet code load is
described in the next section.
Relevant components are shown in Figure 5-2, on page 5-12.
68P02903W22-D
5-7
Dec 2007
Power up procedure without code load
Preparing the cabinet for power up without code load

Follow Procedure 5-1 to prepare the cabinet prior to power up.
Procedure 5-1 Preparing cabinet for power up (without code load)

1
Gain access to the HIISC, CTU2s and LIU by opening the indoor cabinet
door, (and outdoor enclosure doors, if required).
Ensure that the power source isolator is switched off.
Ensure that the correct PSUs are tted to match the supply source voltage,
and that there is no blockage to equipment ventilation inlets or exhausts.
Disconnect all E1 lines from the BTS.
If tted, remove the optional compact ash card from its slot in the HIISC.
Set the switch of each PSU to the Output disable (off) position.
Set all buttons on the circuit breaker unit to the out (off) position.
Powering up the cabinet without code load

Follow Procedure 5-2 to power up the cabinet.
Procedure 5-2 Powering up the cabinet without code load

1
Switch on the external power supply to the cabinet.
Set each PSU switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position; check that each
PSU has the active (green) LED on and the alarm (red) LED off.
Press the FANS circuit breaker button. Check that each fan module is
operating correctly.
Press the DUP circuit breaker button.
Press the MINI SURF circuit breaker button.
Press the SITE circuit breaker button. Check that the HIISC LEDs operate
correctly; green LEDs lit and red LEDs off.
Both red and green LEDs are initially lit while the unit conducts
a self test. After approximately 20 seconds, the red LED will
extinguish, indicating normal condition.
If the cabinet is an expansion cabinet, the SITE circuit breaker

buttons provide power to the XMUX.
Continued
5-8
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Power up procedure with code load
Procedure 5-2 Powering up the cabinet without code load (Continued)

7
Press the appropriate MCBM CTU circuit breaker buttons for the installed
CTU2s, and check that the RADIO STATUS LED for each CTU2 ashes
green.
Close the cabinet door, and outdoor enclosure doors, if appropriate, to

ensure correct ventilation.
This completes the power up procedure for the cabinet without code load.

The following procedure should be carried out to power up the cabinet, with code load. The
code is provided either direct from the BSC from E1 line or from a compact ash card installed
in the slot of the master HIISC.
Relevant components are shown in Figure 5-2, on page 5-12.
Preparing the cabinet for power up with code load

Follow Procedure 5-3 to prepare the cabinet prior to power up.
Procedure 5-3
68P02903W22-D
Preparing the cabinet for power up with code load
Gain access to the HIISC, CTU2s and LIU by opening the indoor cabinet
door, (and outdoor enclosure doors, if required).
Ensure that the E1 connection to the BSC is made.
Insert the (optional) compact ash card into the slot on the HIISC.
Connect the 9 to 9-way cable from the PC serial A port to the HIISC TTY
port.
Start the terminal emulator program at the PC.
Change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt type:

CTRL N
Set the switch of the PSU to the Output disable (off) position.
Set all circuit breaker buttons to the out (off) position.
5-9
Dec 2007
Powering up the cabinet with code load
When the green status LEDs on the CTU2 or the HIISC are ashing, the boot
code is downloading into non-volatile memory for software upgrade.
Do not remove power or reset the cabinet until downloading has been completed,
as this corrupts the non-volatile memory.
If boot code is corrupted, contact the Motorola Customer Network Resolution

Centre and request the boot code restoration procedure and the appropriate
boot code le.
Follow Procedure 5-4 to power up the cabinet.
Procedure 5-4 Powering up the cabinet with code load

1
Switch on the external power supply to the cabinet.
Turn the PSU switch to the Output enable (ON) position; check that the
PSU has the active (green) LED on and the alarm (red) LED off.
Press the FANS circuit breaker button. Check that the fan module is
operating correctly.
Press the DUP circuit breaker button.
Press the MINI SURF circuit breaker button.
Press the SITE circuit breaker button. Check that the HIISC
LEDs operate correctly; green LEDs lit and red LEDs off.
HIISC initialization commences at power up. A connection to the
BSC is established and code download takes place. After download
the site is initialized.
Both red and green LEDs are initially lit while the unit conducts a
self test. When rebooting due to a code download, the red LED
extinguishes after approximately 50 seconds.
Continued
5-10
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 5-4
Views of cabinet and MCBM
Powering up the cabinet with code load (Continued)
If the code is a different version, the non-volatile memory

will be upgraded at this point. Both LEDs will be ashing, and
a warning message will appear on the PC terminal.
Do not power down or reset the cabinet as this corrupts the

non-volatile memory.
If this happens, contact Motorola Customer Network

Resolution Centre and request the boot code restoration
procedure and the appropriate boot code le.
Press the appropriate MCBM CTU circuit breaker

buttons for the installed CTU2s, and check that the
RADIO STATUS LED for each CTU2 ashes green.
At this point, after the HIISC has initialized, the CTU2s downloads
code from the HIISC.
If the code is a different version, the non-volatile memory

will be upgraded at this point. Both LEDs will be ashing, and
a warning message will appear on the PC terminal.
Do not power down or reset the cabinet as this corrupts the

non-volatile memory.
If this happens, contact Motorola Customer Network

Resolution Centre and request the boot code restoration
procedure and the appropriate boot code le.
Once fully initialized, all CTU2s should have RADIO STATUS LED solid
green, and TRANSMIT STATUS LEDs either off or solid yellow.
8
Disconnect the 9 to 9-way cable from the HIISC TTY port.
Close the cabinet door, and outdoor enclosure doors, if appropriate, to

ensure correct ventilation.

Figure 5-2 shows the main cabinet components involved in power up procedures and a detailed
view of the MCBM showing the circuit breaker buttons.
68P02903W22-D
5-11
Dec 2007
Figure 5-2 Cabinet showing power up modules and detailed view of MCBM
5-12
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Sample form 1: Request for connection
XXXXXXXXXX ELECTRIC
REQUEST FOR A CONNECTION OF A
CUSTOMER'S INSTALLATION
The electrical installation at the following address will be ready for connection
on (date) ......................................................................................................................................
NOTE : At least 4 full working days' notice is required.
Address ......................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................ Telephone No. ...................................
DETAILS OF INSTALLATION
The installation to be connected is :
tick as appropriate
A rewire
A completely new installation
An alteration
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT
Cooker
Water heater
Storage radiators
Other list below
CONNECTED LOAD (kW)
METHOD OF EARTHING tick as appropriate
NO OF PHASES
PME
Cable Sheath
RCD
Other
Other
Give Details
Give Details
DECLARATION
The electrical installation, summarised above, complies with the current edition of the Regulations for Electrical
Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers and is now ready for connection to xxxxxxxxx
Electric's supply network.
It is understood that xxxxxxxxxx Electric will carry out tests, required by law, prior to connection, but these tests
will NOT confirm that the installation complies with the IEE Wiring Regulations, NOR will its connection imply
that it is approved by xxxxxxxxxx Electric in any way.
Electrical Installer's Name ............................................................................................................

Address ........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................... Telephone No. .................................
Signed ................................................................................ Date ...............................................
ti-GSM-Hardware-W97-00070-eps-sw.
68P02903W22-D
5-13
Dec 2007
PARTICULARS OF THE INSTALLATION

(Delete or complete items as appropriate)
Type of Installation
New/alteration/addition/to existing installation
Type of earthing (312--03):

(Indicate in the box)
TN--C
Earth Electrode
Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms
TN--S
TN--C--S
Method of Measurement
TT
IT
.............................................
Type (542--02--01) and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characteristics of the supply at the origin of the installation ( 313--01 ):
Nominal voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . volts

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz
......
Number of phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ascertained
by
enquiry
Prospective short--circuit current
Earth fault loop impedance (Ze)
determined
by
calculation
measured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms
Maximum demand . . . . . . . . . . A per phase

Overcurrent protective device -- Type BS
........................
Main switch or circuit--breaker (460--01--02): Type BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(if an r.c.d., rated residual operating current I
Rating . . . . . . . . A
Rating . . . . . . . . A No of poles . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA.)
Method of protection against indirect contact:
1. Earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply
or
2. Other
(Describe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main equipotential bonding conductors (413--02--01/02, 547--02--01): Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm2
schedule of Test Results: Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pages
Details of departures (if any) from the Wiring Regulations (120--04, 120--05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments on existing installation, where applicable (743--01--01): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
68P02903W22-D
5-15
Dec 2007
1.
This document is intended for the initial certification of a new installation or of an alteration or addition to
an existing installation and of an inspection.
2.
The signatures appended are those of the persons authorised by the companies executing the work of
design, construction and inspection and testing respectively. A signatory authorised to certify more than
one category of work shall sign in each of the appropriate places.
3.
Dates to be inserted.
4.
Where particulars of the installation recorded herein constitute a sufficient schedule for the purpose of
Regulation 514--09--01 further drawings / schedules need not be provided. For other installations the
additional drawings/schedules listed below apply.
5.
Insert here the time interval recommended between periodic inspections. Regard should be paid to
relevant National or Local legislation and reference should be made to chapter 13.
6.
The page numbers of each sheet should be indicated together with the total number of sheets involved.
(4)Schedule of additional records.
(6) page 2 of . . . . pages
5-16
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Chapter
6
Site verication procedures
This chapter provides information required for the verication of the Horizon II mini hardware
equipment.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
6-1
Introduction to Horizon II BTS verication procedures
Introduction to Horizon II BTS verication procedures
The procedures described in this section are as follows:
Checking the antenna VSWR and calibrating the transmit output power.
Checking the database equipage.
Checking the backhaul link.
Checking the PIX connections and alarm test.
Site restoration.
CINDY commissioning tool

Many of the procedures described in this chapter can be carried out automatically using the
CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation for details.
6-2
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Site verication test equipment, leads and plugs
Site verication test equipment, leads and plugs
This section provides information on the test equipment required for the procedures in this
chapter.
Ensure that all test equipment associated with commissioning of Motorola cellular
base stations is within calibration date.
Test equipment required

Table 6-1 provides details of the test equipment required to perform the hardware verication
procedures provided in this chapter.
Table 6-1 Hardware verication test equipment

Quantity
1
Description
IBM compatible portable
Personal Computer.
Comments
With
PCMCIA Type 2 slot.
Serial comms port.
Battery power.
Commercial terminal emulator

software.
ESD protection kit.
Signal generator.
Up to 2 GHz.
Digital multimeter.
Hewlett Packard E2378A or equivalent.
30 dB attenuator.
100 watts minimum.
RF adaptor kit.
RTLXQ98088 or equivalent.
N to 7/16 inch adaptor.
N to N barrel adaptor.
A digital power meter which

can measure the burst average
power with 5 W, 10 W 25 W and
50 W elements.
PC PLUS or similar software (suitable for PC

being used).
For example:
Gigtonics 8650A
Gigtonics 8451C
Bird Site Analyser SA-2500A
or equivalent.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
6-3
Dec 2007
Test leads required
Table 6-1
Hardware verication test equipment (Continued)
Quantity
Description
2 metres of N to N male coaxial

cable.
Must be calibrated.
4 metres of N to N male coaxial

cable.
Must be calibrated.
9-way to 9-way cable.
Compatible with PC to TTY port on

CTU2/HIISC.
9-way to 9-way cable (CTU2

only).
DSP MMI/RSS cable, connecting PC to

CTU2 TTY port.
Comments
Test leads required

Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 show schematic wiring diagrams of the test leads required for site
verication.
Figure 6-1
6-4
Horizon II 9-way to 9-way hardware verication cable connections
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Test leads required
Figure 6-2 Horizon II 9-way to 9-way CTU2 cable connections
TCU-B test lead 3086240N01 may alternatively be used instead of CTU2 test lead
3086299N01, but adaptor (58C86540N01) is required to attach the 25-way cable
connector to the 9-way CTU2 port.
68P02903W22-D
6-5
Dec 2007
Test leads required
Connections for a PIX test lead

Table 6-2 shows the details necessary to make a PIX test lead.
Table 6-2
PIX test plug pin connections
From Pin
To Pin
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
9, 10, 11 not used
28, 29 not used
When making the PIX test lead:
Normally open (N/O) PIX inputs should be connected through a 50 ohm resistor.
Normally closed (N/C) PIX inputs should be connected through a 50 kohm

resistor.
Details of N/O and N/C site inputs can be found in the equip_eas le in the
site commissioning database.
Test lead calibration

To minimize variations in test results, ensure that all appropriate test leads used in hardware
verication procedures are calibrated.
Out of calibration test equipment may damage equipment or degrade hardware

performance. To prevent this the following points should be adhered to:
6-6
A recognized laboratory must calibrate all test equipment and associated test
leads annually.
Do not calibrate test equipment or test leads in the eld.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
CTU2 VSWR and cell site offset information
CTU2 VSWR and cell site offset information
The objective of the VSWR check is to ensure that antenna feeders and connectors are properly
terminated. The power calibration procedure ensures that the pre-dened maximum transmitter
power output is correctly set at the RF connector of the equipment.
When a transceiver is manufactured, it undergoes comprehensive transmit-and-receive
calibration procedures. These procedures aim to produce a transceiver that exhibits a at
frequency response over the GSM band. When a transmitter is used, the calibration is
performed by distributing the channels over three detector groups (the detector being the
device that maintains a steady output power level).
In the eld, the procedure for setting the transmit output power involves using a set of
commands called Cell Site Power (CSPWR). The CSPWR, through its functionality of trimming
the BTS output power, can be used to account for any abnormalities that occur between the
CTU2 and the RF. The offset is reduced from the requested power level, so that a steady output
is maintained at the RF connector of the BTS for all the channels.
Complete the procedures, Preparation for output power calibration and VSWR check on page
6-10 before beginning the VSWR and cell site power calibration procedures.
VSWR checks on Horizon II micro
The CTU2 transmit power, in Horizon II micro, is factory calibrated as a macro BTS
(potentially up to: 60 W for PGSM900, 63 W for EGSM900 and 50 W for DCS1800,
in single density high power mode), prior to delivery. Personnel carrying out BTS
calibration must be prepared to calibrate for macro BTS levels.
Refer to the following standards (USA and EC), or equivalent national and regional
regulations, when making calculations for RF equipment:
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High

Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).
With the Horizon II micro BTS the max_tx_bts parameter value MUST be set between 5
and 21 or the transmit power will exceed the value that is specied for this equipment.
For a standard power option, setting the max_tx_bts to less than 5 can result in:
68P02903W22-D
Transmit output power above recommended levels.
Increased fan noise.
The possibility of power cutback or shutdown due to increased enclosure

temperature.
6-7
Dec 2007
Table 6-3
Tx output power during tests

Mode
900 MHz
1800 MHz
Single density
40 W (46 dBm)
32 W (45 dBm)
Double density
20 W (43 dBm)
16 W (42 dBm)

The following test equipment is required during the VSWR and output power calibration
procedure:
An IBM compatible personal computer (PC).
Terminal emulator software.
A digital power meter which can measure the burst average power, with 5 W and 50 W
elements.
A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the chapter on Site
verication procedures).
A 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the chapter
on Site verication procedures).
A 7/16 N-type adaptor.
A 50 ohm, 100 W power attenuator.
All test equipment and test leads must be calibrated annually by a recognized
laboratory. Test equipment and test leads must not be calibrated in the eld.
Do not optimize Motorola cellular base stations with test equipment that is beyond
its calibration due date.
Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes before use.
Commands used
Table 6-4 lists the commands for the VSWR and output power calibration procedure.
The symbol 0 used in the commands is a zero.
6-8
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Table 6-4
Commands used
VSWR and power calibration commands.

Function
BSS MMI Command

ins_device
Initializes the device, bringing it into service.
lock_device
Prevents the device from being used.
unlock_device
Frees the device for further use.
clear_cal_data
Clears previously stored calibration data for a

specied transceiver on a per DRI basis.
chglev
Changes the DSP MMI security level.
cal_test_mode on
Enters the calibration test mode.
fm test_mode on
Puts the DSP fault management module in test mode.
fm_test block none none 0xff
Blocks all the DSP fault management alarms.
cal_config tx_cab_mode <single>

OR
cal_config tx_cab_mode
<double>
Sets Tx power calibration mode for single density.

single is the default mode and can be omitted.
cal_config tx_cab_carriers
<carriera>
OR
cal_config tx_cab_carriers <both>
Sets Tx power calibration to calibrate the rst

carrier only when in double density mode.
carriera is the default carrier and can be omitted.
Sets Tx power calibration to calibrate both
carriers when in double density mode.
This feature is available only with 1670.27, 1740.22,
1760.0C or later software release.
cal_cabinet tx_cab
Performs Tx power calibration.
ts a txp 0x00
Turns all timeslots to max power for the current

carrier.
ts a txp 0xff
Turns off power to all timeslots for the current

carrier.
ts a modulator unmod
Turns off modulation.
ts a state call_proc
Puts all timeslots into call processing state.
ts a synth lock
Locks the synthesizers.
cal_store_1
Stores the calibration data.
cal_config rf_band p900
Overrides for PGSM only Duplexer.
chg_ele max_tx_bts <N> <site_id>

<CELL_ID>
Changes the max_tx_bts parameter to set cell site Tx

output power. Where N is the desired value.
Sets Tx power calibration mode for double density.
For Horizon II micro, this value must be

within the range of 5 to 21 (standard
power option) or 0 to 21 (high power
option).
chg_ele max_tx_bts
68P02903W22-D
Changes the max_tx_bts parameter to a desired

value.
6-9
Dec 2007
Test stages
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (68P02901W23) for

information on usage of specic commands.
Test stages
There are four stages to the procedure:
Preparing for test.
Checking the VSWR.
Calibrating the transmit output power.
Restoring the site.
VSWR checks ensure correct antenna matching and can prove the serviceability of the
antenna. Repeat the procedures for all antennas on site, including receive antennas.

Prepare the RF path for bay level calibration. DRIs in the site must be locked, the CTU2 has to be
reset, a dummy load must be connected if there is no antenna, and all alarms must be disabled.
In the Horizon II macro, a transceiver may consist of one or two DRIs. If a CTU2 is congured
for double density mode (two DRIs), Tx cabinet calibration needs to be performed only on the
rst DRI because the internal difference value keeps the power of the second carrier equal
to the rst.
The internal difference value is not visible through the MMI command, and the TX
offset reported by disp_cal_data for the second DRI is a copy of the value for the rst
DRI. Dual carrier calibration can verify that both carriers transmit at equal power.
Optionally, the Tx power of both DRIs can be calibrated as described in the section, Preparing
to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power.
To determine the conguration of the CTU2 as single or double density transceiver and the
DRI numbers corresponding to each CTU2.
6-10
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
At the BSC TTY, change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt type the following: disp_eq
<site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
Where:
is:
<site_id>
the number of the site logged into.
<cell_id>
the antenna/relative cell number (0 to 5).
<DRI_number>
DRI number of the transceiver.
Output for a single density CTU2:

[05/02/03 14:42:37] MMI-RAM 0115 -> disp_eq 81 dri 0 0
DRI identifier: 0 0
DRI Density[dri_density]: SINGLE
Cabinet identifier: 0
Type of connection to the BTP: MASTER
Port to which the TCU is connected[tcu_port]: 0
RTF identifier[pref_rtf_id]:
GSM cell ID where the DRI appears: 001 01 1 91
Antenna select number for this cell[antenna_select]: 1
Tuneable combining used: No
The diversity flag for this DRI is[diversity_flag]: 0
The fm cell type is[fm_cell_type]: 0
Output for a double density CTU2:
DRI identifier: 0 1
DRI Density[dri_density]: DOUBLE
Associated DRI identifier: 0 2
In this case we see that DRI 0 1 is a double density CTU2 and is associated with DRI 0 2.
68P02903W22-D
6-11
Dec 2007
Repeating the command for DRI 0 2 yields the following:

DRI identifier: 0 2
DRI Density[dri_density]: DOUBLE
Associated DRI identifier: 0 1
Thus, in this example, DRI 0 1 and DRI 0 2 are on the same CTU2.
Calibrate the single density CTU2 once on the DRI.
For the double density CTU2, calibration is performed on only one of the two DRIs, but the other
DRI must be locked for the procedures to be carried out. Furthermore, the clear_cal_data
commands must be issued for both DRIs.
For 4 Branch Rx Diversity the output looks similar to the following:
DRI identifier: 0 0
DRI Density[dri_density]: SINGLE
The diversity flag for this DRI is [diversity_flag]: 2
The fm cell type is [fm_cell_type]: 4
6-12
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Output format for disp_cal_data command

The CTU2 stores calibration data in a higher precision format (UWORDs) than the CTU
(UBYTEs). Since the two transceivers are interchangeable, the data is stored in the database in
a common format and the higher precision UWORD format is now used.
This does not affect the output format of the disp_cal_data command when the transceiver
is unlocked (UWORDs for the CTU2 and UBYTEs for other transceivers). However, if the
transceiver is locked, the data on it cannot be accessed nor can the transceiver type be
determined and therefore the data can only be displayed in the format in which it is stored
on the database (that is, UWORD format).
Use one of the following formulae to convert the appropriate disp_cal_data output to a gain
value (FEG):
For the CTU2: FEG = 2's_complement_16_bit_value / 256
For other transceivers: FEG = 17.5 + (2's_complement_8_bit_value / 10)
Use one of the following formulae to convert the gain value (FEG) to the UWORD or UBYTE
format:
UWORD: 2's_complement_16_bit_value = round(FEG x 256)
UBYTE: 2's_complement_8_bit_value = round{(FEG - 17.5) x 10}
68P02903W22-D
6-13
Dec 2007
Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration
Normal CTU2 VSWR and cell site power (CSPWR)

calibration
CTU2 cell site power calibration and VSWR checks can be carried out automatically
using the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation
for details.
Two methods available for normal VSWR checking are described in this section; one automatic
and one manual. The reason for the two methods is as follows:
VSWR method 1 (automatic) When typing the cal_cabinet tx_cab command at the DSP
MMI prompt, it effectively executes a small script containing the following commands:
TS A CHAN 23
Set all timeslots to channel 23 (900 MHz).
TS A CHAN 53
Set all timeslots to channel 53 (900 MHz PGSM).
TS A CHAN 668
TS A TXP 00
TS A MODULATOR UNMOD
TS A STATE CALL_PROC
TS A SYNTH LOCK
Before executing the cal_cabinet tx_cab command, it assumes that the synthesizers are in
normal mode (not locked), as is the case after the unit is powered up for the rst time.
VSWR method 2 (manual) To set a specic channel, instead of defaulting to channel 23,
53 or 668, additional commands must be entered, rather than using the cal_cabinet tx_cab
command. One command sets the appropriate channel and the other switches the CTU2
output power on and off.
Automatic VSWR test procedure

The rst method for normal VSWR checking uses automatic channel selection. The cal_cabinet
tx_cab command automatically selects a midpoint channel number. However, manual channel
selection can be performed following the steps detailed in the manual test procedure.
To automate the validation of the VSWR of the transmission path:
6-14
Perform Procedure 6-1 Automatic VSWR forward power test on page 6-15.
Perform Procedure 6-2 Automatic VSWR reverse power test on page 6-16.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Automatic VSWR forward power test
Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure that all personnel are clear of
the antenna. Do not carry out this check unless antenna installation is complete.
Ensure that the antenna is rated to allow full power to avoid damage to equipment.
To reduce the possibility of interference with other users, minimize the time that
the CTU2 is powered up.
Procedure 6-1
Automatic VSWR forward power test
Ensure that RF power is OFF before connecting or disconnecting

antenna cables. Severe burns may result if RF power is present when
cables are connected or disconnected
Disable the CTU2 to ensure that RF is not present, then disconnect the antenna.
Connect a dummy load to the meter, ensuring that the meter is tted with a 50
W element and connect the meter to the Tx output.
2
Bring the CTU2 into service using the ins_device command.
At the DSP MMI prompt type:

chglev
pizza (this is a password and appears on screen as *****)
fm test_mode on
cal_cabinet tx_cab
Continued
68P02903W22-D
6-15
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-1
Automatic VSWR forward power test (Continued)
Press N to specify that the test should NOT be run in high power mode.
Monitor and record the power meter reading (the forward output power).
Press Q.
Automatic VSWR reverse power test

Procedure 6-2 Automatic VSWR reverse power test
1

cables are connected or disconnected.
Replace the 50 W element in the wattmeter with a 5 W element and reverse the
direction on the power meter.
2
Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to the antenna.
At the DSP MMI TEST prompt type:

cal_cabinet tx_cab
Press N to specify that the test should NOT be run in high power mode.
Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the power meter.
Readings should show reected (reverse) power of no more than 5%

of the forward power at the point of measurement, and less than 1
W. If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings is unacceptable,
suspect an improper termination of the antenna feeder and connector.
6
Press Q.
Disable the CTU2 then remove the power meter and reconnect the antenna.
This procedure leaves the transceiver in an overridden state. It must

be reset before it can be used.
8
6-16
Use the Site restoration procedure given later in this chapter to return the
site to service.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Manual VSWR test procedure

The second method for normal VSWR checking allows the manual selection of a channel.
To mechanically validate the VSWR of the transmission path through to the antenna:
Perform Procedure 6-3Manual VSWR forward power test on page 6-17.
Perform Procedure 6-4Manual VSWR reverse power test on page 6-19.
Manual VSWR forward power test
Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure that all personnel are clear of
the antenna. Do not carry out this check unless antenna installation is complete.
Ensure that the antenna is rated to allow full power to avoid any damage to equipment.
To reduce the possibility of interference with other users, minimize the time that
the CTU2 is powered up.
Procedure 6-3 Manual VSWR forward power test

1

Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the power meter, ensuring
that the meter is tted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Tx
output.
2
Bring the CTU2 into service using the ins_device command.

Continued
68P02903W22-D
6-17
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-3
3
6-18
Manual VSWR forward power test (Continued)
chglev
pizza this is a password and appears on screen as *****
fm test_mode on
ts a state call_proc
Enter the following command: ts a chan nnn

where: a is all time slots (TS) and nnn is the specied channel number.
To switch the power on, enter the following command: ts a txp 0x00
Where: a is all time slots (TS) and 00 is maximum output power.
Monitor and record the power meter reading (the forward output power).
To switch the power off, enter the following command: ts a txp 0xff
Where: a is all time slots (TS) and ff is zero output power.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Manual VSWR reverse power test

Procedure 6-4
Manual VSWR reverse power test

Replace the 50 W element in the power meter with a 5 W element and reverse
the direction on the power meter.
2
Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to the antenna.
To switch the power on, enter: ts a txp 0x00

Where: a is all time slots (TS) and 00 is maximum output
power.
Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the power meter.
Readings should show reected (reverse) power of no more than 5%

of the forward power at the point of measurement, and less than 1
W. If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings is unacceptable,
suspect an improper termination of the antenna feeder and connector.
5
To switch the power off, enter: ts a txp 0xff

Where: a is all time slots (TS) and ff is zero output
power.
Repeat the above forward and reverse power checks for the required number
of channels.
When all channels have been checked, at the DSP MMI TEST prompt type:
ts a state active_standby.
Remove the power meter and reconnect the antenna.

9
68P02903W22-D
Use the Site restoration procedure given in later in this chapter to return the
site to service.
6-19
Dec 2007
Tx output power calibration procedure

To calibrate CTU2 transmit output power carry out the following procedures:
If required, perform Procedure 6-5Changing the max_tx_bts on page 6-21.
The CTU2 transmit power, in Horizon II micro, is factory calibrated as a macro

BTS (potentially up to: 60 W for PGSM900, 63 W for EGSM900 and 50 W for
DCS1800, in single density high power mode), prior to delivery.
Personnel carrying out BTS calibration must be prepared to calibrate for macro
BTS levels.
Refer to the following standards (USA and EC), or equivalent national and
regional regulations, when making calculations for RF equipment:
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to
Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300
GHz.
CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High

Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).
With the Horizon II micro BTS standard power option the max_tx_bts parameter
value MUST be set between 5 and 21 or the transmit power will exceed that
specied for this equipment.
Setting the max_tx_bts on a standard power unit to less than 5 may result in:
Transmit output power above recommended levels.
Increased fan noise.
The possibility of power cutback or shutdown due to increased enclosure

temperature.
A high power option unit may have the max_tx_bts parameter set between 0 and 21.
6-20
Perform Procedure 6-6Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power on page 6-21.
Perform Procedure 6-7Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power on page 6-24.
Perform Procedure 6-8Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion on page 6-25.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
If the DRI does not become B-U because of the error, Tx Power Unachievable, then
the max_tx_bts of the cell needs to be temporarily modied to a lower power so that
the radio can come into service. At this point, calibration can be performed as normal.
Once the radio is calibrated in its desired conguration (single or double density,
Horizon or Horizon II equipment), the max_tx_bts can be returned to its desired value.
Procedure 6-5
Changing the max_tx_bts
Execute the following command from the OMC, BSC or by remote login from
the PC:
chg_ele max_tx_bts <N> <site_id> cell_number=<CELL_ID>
Where: <N>
is:
the max_tx_bts value (the valid

range for Horizon II micro is 5
to 21, standard power option
or 0 to 21, high power option)
<site_id>
is the site number
<CELL_ID>
is the cell identier
Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power

Procedure 6-6 Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power
1
Connect the 9-way to 9-way HIISC cable from the PC serial A port to the HIISC
TTY port.
At the PC, start the terminal emulator program.
Lock all DRIs in the sector. At the HIISC TTY, change to Level 3 and at the
MMI-RAM> prompt type:
lock_device <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
Always lock the transceiver providing the BCCH last as this prevents
the BCCH being switched to alternate transceivers.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
6-21
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-6 Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power (Continued)

4

Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load/attenuator/coupler to the power
meter, ensuring the meter is tted with a 100 W element. Connect the meter
to the Tx output, ensuring that sufcient attenuation is present to protect the
power meter/sensor from damage.
Ensure that the digital power wattmeter has been correctly set up.
Refer to the manufacturers manual for detailed instructions on how
to carry out the following:
Perform self-calibration of power meter with sensor.
Enter cable offset (Cable loss) into power meter to display the
correct output power.
Enable burst averaging or Burst Average Power.
Ensure that both the carriers A and B are unlocked BEFORE starting the
procedure. Change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt, type:
ins_device <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0
Connect a serial port on the PC to the TTY Interface port on the

CTU2 to be calibrated using the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable.
If necessary, switch the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable from providing RSS
connectivity to providing DSP connectivity.
At the DSP MMI prompt type: chglev. The password is pizza.
Enter calibration test mode and disable alarms by typing the following
commands:
cal_test_mode on
fm test_mode on
Continued
6-22
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-6 Preparing to calibrate CTU2 transmit output power (Continued)

9
By default, Tx calibration is performed in the mode specied in the database. To

force Tx calibration in either single or double density mode for a transceiver,
enter one of the following commands as required:
cal_config tx_cab_mode single
cal_config tx_cab_mode double
To reset Tx calibration to the mode specied
in the database, enter the following command:
cal_config tx_cab_mode database
When conguring a double density CTU2, the second carrier needs to

be locked BEFORE calibration if the same calibration gures are to
be used for the operation of both A and B carriers.
10
OPTIONAL STEP TO CALIBRATE CARRIER B. This step is only applicable if

calibrating in double density mode (see step 9). By default, only the rst carrier
(Carrier A) is calibrated. To calibrate the second carrier (Carrier B) additionally,
specify that both carriers are to be calibrated with the following command:
cal_config tx_cab_carriers both
This feature is only available with software release 1670.27, 1740.22,

1760.0C or later. Both carriers have approximately the same output
power. Due to variations in the hardware and factory calibration,
small differences can occur. To ne-tune the calibration so that both
carriers can achieve the same power, specify that both carriers should
be calibrated by entering the above command.
To reset Tx calibration to only calibrate Carrier A, enter the following command:
cal_config tx_cab_carriers carriera
11
900 MHz radios take the EGSM RF band from the EID by default. If
PGSM duplexers are tted, the radio needs to be congured for the
PGSM band.
To set the RF band to PGSM900, enter the following command:
cal_config rf_band p900
The following message is displayed on the screen:
Setting RF band to PGSM900
68P02903W22-D
6-23
Dec 2007
Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power

Procedure 6-7 Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power
1
Start the Tx calibration procedure by typing the following

command at the DSP MMI prompt: cal_cabinet tx_cab
The following warning message is displayed on the screen:
WARNING! All attenuation is about to be removed.
Please ensure that appropriate attenuation
is attached to the CTU2 TX output.
Press any key to continue
Check the connections to the antenna and then press ENTER.

For calibration in single density mode only, the following information and
instructions is printed:
High Power Mode is currently DISABLED (max_tx_bts is >= 0).
High Power Mode will only be used if max_tx_bts database
parameter is set to -1.
If the current site database is accurate, you should run
TX cabinet calibration in the same mode as the database.
Press H to calibrate in High Power Mode, or press N to calibrate
in Normal Power Mod
The above message does not appear if the transceiver is set to high
power mode.
3
For Horizon II micro, only use N.

Press H or N, as appropriate.
The following instructions is displayed:
Press U to increase power, D to decrease power
until the target output power is reached.
Then press Q when finished.
Continued
6-24
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-7 Calibrating CTU2 transmit output power (Continued)

4
Press U to increase output power or D to decrease output power until the

reading on the power meter matches the target maximum power for the sector.
With the Horizon II micro BTS standard power option the max_tx_bts
parameter value MUST be set between 5 and 21 or the transmit power
will exceed the value that is specied for this equipment. A high power
option BTS may have a max_tx_bts parameter setting of 0 to 21.
As the output power is adjusted, a message similar to the following is displayed:
Setting offset to = 0x13
5
Press Q when the desired output power level has been reached.
If Carrier B was congured to be calibrated in the previous procedure, then

follow the on screen directions to repeat step 2 to step 5 for Carrier B.
Otherwise, proceed to next step.
Store the new Tx calibration using the

following DSP MMI command: cal_store_1
After a few seconds delay (up to 16 seconds), the result of the data storage is
displayed on the screen in the format:
cal_store_1
PASS
CTU2.carA.ts_0>
After the data has been stored, connect the 9-way to 9-way HIISC
cable from the PC serial A port to the HIISC MMI TTY port and enter
the following command to lock the CTU2 that has been calibrated:
lock_device <site_id> dri <cell_id> <DRI_number> 0.
Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion

Procedure 6-8
Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion
Move the 9-way to 9-way DSP MMI/RSS cable to the CTU2 TTY port of the next
CTU2 to be calibrated and repeat the procedure from Procedure 6-5 on page
6-21 step 4.
Disable the CTU2. Remove the power meter and check that all antennas have
been reconnected.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
6-25
Dec 2007
Tx enclosure channel numbers and frequencies
Procedure 6-8 Calibrating additional CTU2s and completion (Continued)

3
Use the Site restoration procedure given later in this chapter to return the
site to service.
Tx enclosure channel numbers and frequencies

The Tx channel numbers and frequencies for the Horizon II equipment are as follows:
6-26
TS A CHAN 23
TS A CHAN 53
Set all timeslots to channel 53 (900 MHz PGSM).
TS A CHAN 668
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Checking the database equipage
Checking the database equipage
The database equipage checks determine what devices and functions have been equipped in
the BSC/Horizon II BTS database.

The following test equipment is required during the procedure:
A 9-way to 9-way cable.
Commands used
The following commands are used during the procedure:
Function
Command
disp_site
disp_equipment
Displays the site number.

Displays the active equipment at a specied site.
Test procedures for checking the database equipage

There are two stages to the procedure:
Preparation for database checks on page 6-28.
Database equipage check procedure on page 6-28.
68P02903W22-D
6-27
Dec 2007
Preparation for database checks

Procedure 6-9 Preparation for database checks
1
Ensure that the site is in call processing mode.
Connect the serial A port on the PC to the HIISC TTY port using the 9-way to
9-way cable.
Database equipage check procedure

Procedure 6-10 Database equipage check
1
At the CUST MMI prompt type: disp_site

The following message (from the HIISC) is displayed:
current site is #
where # is the number of the site logged into.
At the CUST MMI prompt type: disp_equipment #

where # is the number of the site logged into.
A complete list of the equipment and functions in the database
is displayed. For example an omni 2 gives:
CSFP 000
BTP 000
DRI 000 (010)
DRI 010 (000)
MMS 000
MMS 010
RSL 000
GCLK 000
EAS 000
CAB 000
SITE 000
PATH 000
RTF 000
RTF 010
Continued
6-28
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-10 Database equipage check (Continued)

3
To check the MSI conguration at the CUST MMI prompt

type: disp_equipment # MSI 0 0 Where: # is site number.
A message similar to the following example is displayed:
MSI identifier: 0
MSI type [msi_type]: NIU2
68P02903W22-D
6-29
Dec 2007
Checking the backhaul link
Checking the backhaul link
The backhaul link checks verify the integrity of the links back to the BSC/MSC.

The backhaul link checks require the following test equipment:
A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the Test equipment, leads
and plugs section).
Commands used
The following command is used to carry out the procedure:
Function
Command
state
Displays the status of specied devices or

functions.
Test procedures for checking the backhaul link

6-30
Preparation for the network backhaul link check on page 6-31.
Backhaul link test procedure on page 6-31.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Preparation for the network backhaul link check

The following procedure is used to set up the equipment to check the backhaul links:
Procedure 6-11 Preparation for the network backhaul link check

1
Make sure the site is in call processing mode.
Connect the serial A port on the PC to the HIISC TTY port using the 9-way to
9-way cable.
The system and the hardware are set up to check the backhaul links.
Backhaul link test procedure

Procedure 6-12 Backhaul link test procedure
1
Contact the BSC/MSC of the backhaul link to be tested, and request a loopback
on the relevant Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) port.
Repeat for all backhaul links.
If the backhaul link has not been installed, perform this test at
the DDF in the site.
If no DDF is tted, do this test at the top of the cabinet.
Ascertain the site number, equipment list and MMS conguration.
At the CUST MMI prompt enter: state # MMS *

* * where # is location, and * * * is dev/func id.
For example: state 2 MMS 0 1 0
Example system message on page 6-32 shows the system message
from the HIISC:
If this display shows Unlocked and Disabled then the T43, cabling and the
backhaul link are all good.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
6-31
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-12 Backhaul link test procedure (Continued)

If the loop is removed and the command re-entered, the result is displayed.
A delay in excess of 20 seconds may be required before a change in

status is registered.
If the display continues to show Unlocked and Busy, this may be
because:
The wrong connection is looped, if the cabling is direct.
The MMS may be terminated by a device generating a backhaul

link.
Example system message

DEVICE STATUS INFORMATION FOR LOCATION 2:
OPER STATES:
D:Disabled E:Enabled
B:Busy
ADMIN STATES:
L:Locked
U:Unlocked E:Equipped
S:Shutdown
Last Transition Related

Device
State Reason
dd/mm hh:mm:ss Function
---------- ----- -------------------------- --------------- -------MMS 0 1 0
B-U
No reason
18/02
13:23:05 None
END OF STATUS REPORT
6-32
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Checking PIX connections and alarms
Checking PIX connections and alarms
The alarm tests check the serial connections and alarm status.

The PIX connections and alarms checks require the following test equipment:
A 9-way to 9-way cable.
Commands used
The following commands are used to test the PIX connections:
Command
Function
alarm_mode <site_id> on
Enables alarm reporting for a specied site.
disp_act_alarm <site_id>
Displays active alarms at the specied site.
equip <site_id> EAS
Equip the external IAS alarm system at the

specied site.
68P02903W22-D
6-33
Dec 2007
Test procedures for checking PIX connections and alarms

Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test on page 6-34.
PIX connection test procedure on page 6-35.
Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test

Procedure 6-13 Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test
1
Ensure that the software download has been completed.
Connect the serial A port on the PC to the master HIISC using the 9-way to
9- way cable.
The system displays the CUST MMI prompt.

4
Enter the password at the CUST MMI prompt.
Use the equip <site_id> EAS command to set up reference conditions for
checking that the alarms operate correctly when the appropriate relay changes
state.
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference,

(68P02901W23) for specic details regarding the equip command.
6-34
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
PIX connection test procedure

The following procedure can be used to test the PIX connections on each PIX board.
Procedure 6-14 PIX connection test

1
At the CUST MMI prompt type: alarm_mode # on

where # is the site number.
Connect a suitable test lead to the PIX connector.
Wait at least six seconds before continuing the testing. The time is
required to allow polling to detect the presence of the test plug.
3
Type the disp_act_alarm command to view the alarms.

The system displays all 8 alarms.
The display depends on the database settings, that is, whether a fault
condition is indicated by a closed loop or an open loop.
If the high power external fan module is tted to the unit alarm
channel 8 is permanently closed circuit.
68P02903W22-D
Change the state of each alarm using the test plug/lead. If the appropriate
relay is operating correctly, the alarm state changes accordingly (alarm either
cleared or activated).
Remove the test lead.

The system clears the alarm display.
If testing Horizon II macro, repeat procedure for the second PIX board.
6-35
Dec 2007
Site restoration
Site restoration
After Tx output power calibration procedures are completed, restore the site using the following
procedure.
Commands used
Table 6-5 lists the commands for the site restoration procedure.
The symbol 0 used in the commands is a zero.
Table 6-5
VSWR and power calibration site restoration commands.
BSS MMI Command
Function
unlock_device
Frees the device for further use.
disp_act_alarm
Displays active alarms at the specied site.
chglev
Changes the DSP MMI security level.
cal_staus tall
Displays: the ash retrieval status, the datapool valid

ag and the checksum for all calibration datapools.
disp_cal_data
When transceiver is locked:

Displays calibration data in the CM
database for the specied transceiver.
When transceiver is unlocked:
Displays calibration data in the RAM of
the specied transceiver.
Site restoration procedure

After the Tx output power calibration is completed, restore the site by using the following
procedure.
If the DRI does not become B-U because of the error, Tx Power Unachievable,
please refer to the Tx output power calibration section of this document.
6-36
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-15 Post Tx output power calibration site restoration

1

Remove the signal generator and dummy load and reconnect the site RF cables.
2
Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU2
and connect to the HIISC TTY port.
Reset the CTU2 by:
Horizon II macro and Horizon II mini Tripping and resetting the

appropriate circuit breaker.
Horizon II micro Switching the PSU to output disable (off) and then
switching to output enable (on) again.
(The CTU2 does not have a front panel reset button).
This step must be carried out to initialize software and so ensure that
the CTU2 is correctly brought into service.
4
Type:
unlock_device <site_id> dri <Cell_id> <DRI_identity> 0
The CTU2 is now in the BUSY-UNLOCKED state.
Type:
disp_act_alarm <site_id> dri <Cell_id> <DRI_identity> 0
Conrm that there is no DRI 218 alarm. If there is a DRI 218 alarm, redo the
whole bay level calibration procedure.
Remove the 9-way to 9-way cables from the HIISC TTY port and connect to
the TTY interface port on the CTU2.

chglev
pizza
(this is a password and appears on screen as *****)
Continued
68P02903W22-D
6-37
Dec 2007
Procedure 6-15 Post Tx output power calibration site restoration (Continued)

8
Verify the calibration result and datapool valid ag by typing

cal_status tall
at the command line and comparing with the
Example of calibration status on page 6-39.
Conrm that the Result and Valid Checksum values are pass and valid,
respectively, for both TX CAB A and TX CAB B.
If these values are incorrect the appropriate calibration must be

repeated.
9
Verify the antenna calibration data or transmit power offset by typing

disp_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id> <device_id2> [<device_id3>]
at the command line and comparing with the Example
of calibration data format (for antenna 0) on page 6-40.
Conrm that the value for the Transmit Power Offsets is correct.
If this value is incorrect the Tx power output calibration must be

repeated.
10
6-38
Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU2.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Example of calibration status

Entering the cal_status tall command gives a result similar to the example below:
System response:
CTU2.carA.ts_0>cal_status tall
Cal
Ca Br
Status Result
Valid.Checksum
Ver S/HC
--------------------------------------------------------------------RF Lop
A
0
pass
valid
0x0672d5b5
1 / 1
RF Lop
B
0
pass
valid
0x0d7b5025
1 / 1
RX RF
A
0
pass
valid
0x2ae0b9fc
1 / 1
RX RF
A
1
pass
valid
0x2bb91f4a
1 / 1
RX RF
B
0
pass
valid
0x2c1ed905
1 / 1
RX RF
B
1
pass
valid
0x2b063b6b
1 / 1
RX IF
A
0
pass
valid
0xc8bc3caf
1 / 1
RX IF
A
1
pass
valid
0xc8d99f37
1 / 1
RX IF
B
0
pass
valid
0xc8dadb3f
1 / 1
RX IF
B
1
pass
valid
0xc8bfbd0a
1 / 1
RX FR
A
0
pass
valid
0xa8fe3af6
1 / 1
RX FR
A
1
pass
valid
0xa8e8ba39
1 / 1
RX FR
B
0
pass
valid
0xa8fb5db7
1 / 1
RX FR
B
1
pass
valid
0xa8f593e0
1 / 1
RX CAB
A
0
pass
valid
0x53703256
0 / 1
RX CAB
B
0
pass
valid
0x45562835
0 / 1
TX VVA
A
0
pass
valid
0xb0be7eb2
1 / 1
TX VVA
B
0
pass
valid
0x96686359
1 / 1
TX DSA
A
0
pass
valid
0x01a775df
1 / 1
TX DSA
B
0
pass
valid
0x01a7863a
1 / 1
TX FP
A
0
pass
valid
0x09e81286
1 / 1
TX FP
B
0
pass
valid
0x07c8ee22
1 / 1
TX Ver
A
0
pass
valid
0x064b1162
1 / 1
TX Ver
B
0
pass
valid
0x063b5e9a
1 / 1
TX CAB
A
0
pass
valid
0x019e2da9
1 / 1
TX CAB
B
0
pass
valid
0x01bd2da9
1 / 1
PA Det
A
0
pass
valid
0x15cc24be
1 / 1
PA Det
B
0
pass
valid
0xd7dc8932
1 / 1
PA VVA
A
0
pass
valid
0xda5d5f94
1 / 1
68P02903W22-D
6-39
Dec 2007
Example of calibration data format (for antenna 0)

Entering the disp_cal_data <site_id> DRI <device_id> <device_id2> [<device_id3>]
command, for example disp_cal_data 63 dri 0 0 0 gives a result similar to the example
below:
is:
Where:
63
site
dri
dri device
rst dev_id
second dev_id
third dev_id
The example below shows the data from a calibration when Only antenna 0 was calibrated
(It is recommended that all antennas are calibrated, but it is permissible to calibrate only
the antennas to be used).
In the following example: antenna number 1 represents antenna 0A, antenna number 2
represents antenna 1A, antenna number 3 represents antenna 2A, antenna number 4 represents
antenna 0B, antenna number 5 represents antenna 1B, antenna number 6 represents antenna
2B.
System response:
DRI ID: 0 0 0
Data read from database
Store Calibration Data: enabled
Calibration Data (All values in Hex):
Transmit Power Offsets = 12
Receive System Data:
Antenna Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
--------------------------------------------a4b, e80, e80, a7b, e80, e80
a3e, e80, e80, aff, e80, e80
a5d, e80, e80, b45, e80, e80
a8e, e80, e80, b5e, e80, e80
aca, e80, e80, b4b, e80, e80
ae8, e80, e80, b64, e80, e80
af3, e80, e80, b61, e80, e80
af2, e80, e80, b8b, e80, e80
ae3, e80, e80, b65, e80, e80
ac0, e80, e80, b65, e80, e80
a97, e80, e80, b46, e80, e80
a70, e80, e80, ae7, e80, e80
a2d, e80, e80, a6b, e80, e80
9f6, e80, e80, a28, e80, e80
9b7, e80, e80, 95e, e80, e80
954, e80, e80, 91d, e80, e80
943, e80, e80, 909, e80, e80
921, e80, e80, 8e3, e80, e80
911, e80, e80, 8d5, e80, e80
8ef, e80, e80, 8b7, e80, e80
8d0, e80, e80, 8a1, e80, e80
899, e80, e80, 855, e80, e80
6-40
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Chapter
7
Decommissioning the Horizon II mini
This chapter describes how to decommission a Horizon II mini cabinet. To decommission

equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example E1 links, power supplies and antennas, refer
to the vendor instructions.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
7-1
Potentially hazardous voltages, in excess of 240 V AC, may be present inside

the cabinet.
Use extreme caution when working on the equipment while power is applied.
Remove all rings, watches and other jewelry.
Read all the earlier chapters of this manual, before attempting to decommission a
Horizon II mini cabinet.
Decommissioning using the checklist

Completion of the following procedures should be recorded using the checklist supplied at the
end of this chapter to ensure that each action has been completed. Photocopy the checklist as
often as required; do not write on the original copy provided in this manual.
Initial decommissioning checks

When starting to decommission a Horizon II mini cabinet:
7-2
Contact the OMC-R and ensure that the cabinet is taken out of service.
Open the cabinet and/or enclosure door and power down the cabinet, as described in
Powering down the cabinet on page 7-3 in this section.
Ensure that NO power is connected to the cabinet.
Ensure that sufcient packing cartons are available to pack the decommissioned
equipment.
Ensure that any unused items have been retrieved from storage elsewhere.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Powering down the cabinet
Powering down the cabinet

Follow Procedure 7-1 to power down the cabinet.
Procedure 7-1 Powering down the cabinet

1
Set all circuit breaker buttons to the out (off) position.
Switch the battery module, (if tted), to the off position.
Switch each to the Output disable (off) position.
Switch off the external power supply to the cabinet.

The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union
(EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) when using
Motorola Networks equipment in EU countries.
Disposal of Motorola Networks equipment in EU countries
Please do not dispose of Motorola Networks equipment in landll sites.

In the EU, Motorola Networks in conjunction with a recycling partner will ensure that equipment
is collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU environmental law.
Please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24 hour
telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com/. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively, if you do not have access
to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local Motorola Ofce.
Disposal of Motorola Networks equipment in non-EU countries

In non-EU countries, dispose of Motorola Networks equipment in accordance with national
and regional regulations.
Returning equipment to Motorola

If sending equipment back to Motorola, seal the shipping containers and return, as advised,
by the Motorola in-country project manager.
68P02903W22-D
7-3
Dec 2007
Decommissioning a Horizon II mini
Decommissioning a Horizon II mini
The indoor cabinet may be mounted:
Bolted directly to the oor.
Bolted to a wall mounted bracket.
Installed in a 19 inch rack, using an adaptor frame.
Installed in an outdoor enclosure.
The outdoor enclosure may be:
Bolted to a plinth secured to the oor.
Bolted to a wall mounted bracket.
After the disconnection of all cabling, each mounting method requires a different procedure to
decommission the cabinet. These procedures are described in the following sections:
Removing a oor mounted cabinet on page 7-5.
Removing a wall mounted cabinet on page 7-6.
Removing a cabinet from 19 inch racking on page 7-7.
Removing a cabinet from an outdoor enclosure on page 7-7.
Removing a oor mounted outdoor enclosure on page 7-8.
Removing a wall mounted outdoor enclosure on page 7-8.
Disconnecting cabinet cables

Follow these procedures to disconnect Horizon II macro cabinet cables for decommissioning:
Procedure 7-2Checking and disconnecting from the power source on page 7-5.
Procedure 7-3Disconnecting all remaining external cables on page 7-5.
Untidy disconnected cables can create a trip hazard to personnel using the site.
7-4
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Removing a oor mounted cabinet
Follow Procedure 7-2 to disconnect power supply cables.
Procedure 7-2 Checking and disconnecting from the power source

1
Check the cabinet for signs of damage.
Ensure that power is NOT present at the cabinet.
Disconnect the AC or DC input power cables, from the power source.
Disconnect the AC or DC input power cables from the cabinet back panel.
Stow disconnected cables safely.
If the power cable is not to be used again for other equipment, dispose
of safely.
Follow Procedure 7-3 to disconnect remaining cables.
Procedure 7-3
Disconnecting all remaining external cables
Disconnect all cabling from the interface panel.
Disconnect all RF cables to antennas or other cabinets.
Disconnect bre optic cables between main cabinet and any expansion
cabinets.
Disconnect the earth cable.
Stow disconnected cables safely.
If the cables are not to be used again for other equipment, dispose of them
safely.
Removing a oor mounted cabinet
68P02903W22-D
The indoor cabinet can weigh up to 46 kg if fully equipped. Handle with extreme
caution, and in accordance with local health and safety regulations.
Heavy equipment must not be handled without the use of lifting equipment,
unless sufcient personnel are available to ensure that Health and Safety
regulations are not breached.
7-5
Dec 2007
Removing a wall mounted cabinet
Follow Procedure 7-4 to remove a oor. mounted cabinet for decommissioning.
Procedure 7-4 Removing oor mounted cabinets

1
Unscrew the four bolts that secure the cabinet to the oor.
Move the cabinet to gain access to both mounting brackets.
Unscrew the bolts and remove the brackets.
Carefully pack all bolts, washers and other removed items.
Pack the cabinet and brackets, for storage, transport or safe disposal.
Removing a wall mounted cabinet

Follow Procedure 7-5 to remove a wall mounted cabinet for decommissioning.
Procedure 7-5 Removing wall mounted cabinets
7-6
Unscrew the two cabinet securing bolts, located underneath the front of
the wall bracket.
Lift and pull the cabinet to remove from the wall bracket. Lower the cabinet
to the oor.
Unscrew the Wall bracket anchor bolts and lift the plinth to the oor.
Dissemble the two part wall bracket by removing the eight bolts, at the rear,
securing the lower section.
Pack the cabinet and wall bracket in separate containers, for storage,
transport or safe disposal.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Removing a cabinet from 19 inch racking
Removing a cabinet from 19 inch racking

Follow Procedure 7-6 to remove rack mounted cabinets for decommissioning.
Procedure 7-6
Removing rack mounted cabinets
Unscrew the four front bolts that secure the cabinet to the rack adaptor
frame.
Slide the cabinet out of the adaptor frame.
Unscrew the bolts and remove the mounting brackets from the front of
the cabinet.
Repeat step step 1 to step 3 for the second cabinet, if tted.
Unscrew the eight M6 bolts and remove the adaptor frame. Remove the
cage nuts from the 19 inch racking.
Pack the cabinet, brackets and adaptor frame in separate containers, for
storage, transport or safe disposal.
Removing a cabinet from an outdoor enclosure

Follow Procedure 7-7 to remove a cabinet from an outdoor enclosure.
Procedure 7-7 Removing a cabinet from an outdoor enclosure

1
Isolate the installation from the external power supply.
Disconnect all other external connections, including antenna

connections.
Loosen the four captive screws at the corners of the door.
Disconnect the earth bonding cable and lift the door away from the
enclosure.
Remove the fasteners retaining the HMS access panel and carefully
remove it.
Continued
68P02903W22-D
7-7
Dec 2007
Removing a oor mounted outdoor enclosure
Procedure 7-7
Removing a cabinet from an outdoor enclosure (Continued)
Disconnect the HMS alarm and power cables.
Unlock the four draw latches securing the HMS unit and remove it.
Remove brackets, then carefully lift the indoor cabinet out of the
enclosure.
Removing a oor mounted outdoor enclosure

To remove a oor mounted outdoor enclosure, rst remove the cabinet as shown in
Procedure 7-7, then proceed as described in Procedure 7-8.
Procedure 7-8 Removing a oor mounted outdoor enclosure

1
Unbolt the oor mounting bolts.
Carefully remove the enclosure.
Removing a wall mounted outdoor enclosure

To remove a wall mounted outdoor enclosure, rst remove the cabinet as shown in
Procedure 7-7, then proceed as described in Procedure 7-9.
Procedure 7-9
7-8
Removing a wall mounted outdoor enclosure
While supporting the enclosure, remove the xing bolts holding it to

the wall mounting frame.
Carefully remove the wall mounted enclosure.
Unbolt and remove the wall mounting frame.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Index
Index
19 inch rack mount for indoor cabinet . .

61.8% rule
2-15
61.8% rule (contd.)

earthing test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
A
a.c. power distribution module . . . . .
a.c. power, connecting to indoor cabinet.
AC to DC upgrade
DC outdoor mini . . . . . . . . . . .
access
restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
alarms
PIX
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
alarms, customer-specic . . . . . . . .
.
.
3-37
3-66
3-80
antenna 0
calibration status example
site restoration CTU2 . .
antennas, duplexing. . . . .
architecture . . . . . . . . .
arrival at site . . . . . . . .
automatic power test
VSWR
forward . . . . . . . . .
reverse . . . . . . . . .
. . 3-7
.
1-10
.
.
6-35
3-60
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-40
.
2-35
. . 4-2
.
1-23
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
6-15
6-16
B
back panel
cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connector locations . . . . . . . .
Backhaul
transient and lightning protection
lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
backhaul cables . . . . . . . . . . .
backhaul link
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
commands . . . . . . . . . . .
preparation . . . . . . . . . . .
system message example . . . .
test equipment . . . . . . . . .
base site structure . . . . . . . . .
battery
backup
duration. . . . . . . . . . . . .
module, tting . . . . . . . . . .
module, installation procedure . .
bend radius
optical bers
minimum . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIB/BIM
American safety regulations . . .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
BIB/BIM (contd.)
. . .
. . .
2-53
2-53
of
. . .
. . .
3-32
3-52
6-30 to
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
6-31
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-30
1-26
. . .
. . .
. . .
1-19
2-81
2-84
. . .
2-62
. . .
3-54
interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 to
2-58, 2-66, 3-55, 3-60
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
BIB/T43 mapping
to NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
bow tie conguration . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
bow tie conguration, example of . . . . . . 4-9
BSC connectivity
E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
BTS
architecture and interoperability . . . . . 4-4
architecture of legacy Motorola hardware
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
hardware equivalents for different equipment
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
mandatory requirements for master
BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
omni 2 or 4 with two DUP and CMB . . . 4-9
site layout plan . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
split cell operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
IX-1
Index
C
cabinets, maximum number per site . . .
2-30
cable glands
tting to power supply cables . . . . . .
3-66
for signal cables. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
cable types
bre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
cables
a.c. power, insulation check. . . . . . . . 5-6
current carrying capacity . . . . . . . .
3-62
disconnecting during decommissioning . . 7-4
optical bre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
power supply, colour coding. . . . . . .
3-65
calibration
test equipment
commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Tx output power . . . . . . . . . . 6-20, 6-24
additional CTU2s . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
calibration status
example
site restoration CTU2 . . . . . . . . .
6-39
example antenna 0
site restoration CTU2 . . . . . . . . .
6-40
caring for optical bres . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
cell site
CTU2
offset information . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
channel numbers
Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
checks
pre-power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
CINDY commissioning tool
used for CSPWR calibration. . . . . . . . 6-2
clear_cal_data
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
code load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-9
commands
backhaul link
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
cell site power (CSPWR) . . . . . . . . . 6-7
clear_cal_data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
database equippage
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
commands (contd.)
PIX connectors and alarms
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
site restoration
power calibration CTU2. . . . . . .
VSWR check CTU2 . . . . . . . . .
VSWR check
CTU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTU2 test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
commissioning, equipment required for.
completion and inspection form . . . . .
concrete
drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connection
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connections
PIX
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
request
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . .
connectors
bre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . .
cover
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
access restrictions . . . . . . . . .
cross bonding
metalwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSPWR
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
use of CINDY commissioning tool . .
site restoration after Tx output power
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTU2
cell offset information. . . . . . . . .
CSPWR calibration . . . . . . . . . .
VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VSWR calibration . . . . . . . . . . .
CTU2, slot allocation . . . . . . . . . .
customer-specic alarms . . . . . . . .
6-33
.
.
6-36
6-36
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-8
6-8
5-1
5-4
5-2
5-15
3-26
2-69
6-35
. .
.
2-64
. .
. .
. .
.
5-5
3-6
3-7
3-7
1-29
.
6-14
. . 6-2
.
6-36
. . 6-7
.
6-14
. . 6-7
.
6-14
.
2-11
.
3-60
D
daisy chaining
site earthing . . .
database
check equippage .
additional CTU2s
commands . . .
test equipment .
IX-2
database (contd.)
. . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
.
.
.
.
6-28
6-27
6-27
6-27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
equippage check
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
DC outdoor variant
upgrade procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80
decommissioning
a cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Index
decommissioning (contd.)
a cabinet (contd.)
initial checks . . . . . . . . . . .
powering down . . . . . . . . . .
a oor mounted cabinet . . . . . . .
removing a cabinet from 19 inch
racking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removing a oor mounted enclosure
removing a wall mounted cabinet . .
removing a wall mounted outdoor
enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
decommissioning (contd.)
. . .
. . .
. . .
7-2
7-3
7-6
. . .
. . .
. . .
7-7
7-8
7-6
. . .
7-8
removing indoor cabinet from outdoor

enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
digital connections between cabinets . . .
dimensions, indoor cabinet and outdoor
enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
door
opening/removing from outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33,
retting to outdoor enclosure . . . . . .
DUP, terminating unused SMA inputs . . .
duplexing antennas . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
2-36
1-11
3-60
3-73
2-33
2-35
E
E1
line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-4
E1 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
earth
cable ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
cable routeing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-72
cables
connecting to outdoor enclosure . . .
3-61
current carrying capacity . . . . . . .
2-72
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
cables, safety when installing . . . . . .
2-75
components to be used . . . . . . . . .
1-29
continuity check prior to applying
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
electrode setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
electrode system . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
electrode testing . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
main connection point in outdoor
enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63
rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
earthing
61.8% rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
additional internal earths for outdoor
enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
common earth point. . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
fall of potential test . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
indoor cabinet to outdoor enclosure . . 3-45,
3-60
outdoor site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
requirements outdoor . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
slope test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 3-30
earthing (contd.)
typical site earthing plan . . .
view of cabinet earthing points
wrist strap . . . . . . . . . .
earthquake proong . . . . . .
earting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electrical specications . . . . .
EMP devices . . . . . . . . . .
environmental limits . . . . . .
equipment
backhaul link
check . . . . . . . . . . . .
database equippage
check . . . . . . . . . . . .
check . . . . . . . . . . . .
test
commissioning . . . . . . .
VSWR check
CTU2 test . . . . . . . . . .
equipment, customer specic . .
ESP connection point . . . . . .
example
antenna 0 calibration status
site restoration CTU2 . . . .
calibration status
site restoration CTU2 . . . .
system message
backhaul link check . . . . .
expansion cabinets . . . . . . .
external alarms connector
pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . .
shorting plug . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-28
2-73
2-73
1-14
2-29
1-18
2-29
1-13
. . . . .
6-30
. . . . .
6-27
. . . . .
6-33
. . . . . .
5-2
. . . . . . 6-8
. . . . .
3-60
. . . . .
2-74
. . . . .
6-40
. . . . .
6-39
. . . . .
. . . . .
6-32
2-65
2-55, 3-49, 3-60

. . . . .
2-55
F
fall of potential test . . . . . . . . . . . .
fan control module
view showing connections . . . . . . .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
1-30
bre optic cables
3-35
IX-3
Index
forward power test

VSWR
automatic . . . . . . . .
manual . . . . . . . . .
foundations
outdoor . . . . . . . . . .
constructing . . . . . .
cross sectional diagram .
depth . . . . . . . . . .
frequencies
Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . .
frequency
band characteristics . . .
bands . . . . . . . . . . .
capability . . . . . . . . .
hopping . . . . . . . . . .
bre optic cables (contd.)

cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting to site expansion board .
connections on site expansion board
expansion cabinet . . . . . . . . . .
bres and connectors . . . . . . . . .
oor mount, indoor cabinet . . . . . .
oor mounting brackets
indoor cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . .
view when tted . . . . . . . . .
oor mounting plinth
outdoor enclosure. . . . . . . . . .
outdoor enclosure, installing . . . .
forms
completion and inspection . . . . .
request for connection . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
3-56,
. .
. .
2-65
3-56
2-68
3-60
2-63
2-13
. .
. .
2-13
2-13
. .
. .
3-13
3-17
. .
. .
5-15
5-13
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
6-15
6-17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-31
1-32
1-31
1-31
. . . . . . .
6-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-22
1-22
1-22
1-22
connector on expansion board

view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . .
pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
2-70
3-59
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G
GMSK modulation. .
GPS
cables . . . . . . .
connection . . . .
connector location
. . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
3-58
2-69
2-69
GPS (contd.)
H
HMS (contd.)
HMS
latch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
retting to outdoor enclosure . . . . . .
3-36
3-71
removal from outdoor enclosure . . . .

humidity , relative. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
1-13
I
indoor cabinet
19 inch adapter frame
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 inch rack mount . . . . . . . . . .
19 inch rack mounting
recommended bolt type . . . . . . .
brackets for tting to outdoor enclo
sure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting a.c. power . . . . . . . .
decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . .
removing a oor mounted cabinet .
removing a wall mounted cabinet . .
removing cabinet from 19 inch rack
removing cabinet from outdoor
enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . .
earthing and ESP connection points .
IX-4
indoor cabinet (contd.)

.
.
2-27
2-15
2-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-43
2-4
3-66
7-1
7-6
7-6
7-7
. . 7-7
. . 7-4
.
2-72
tting into 19 inch adapter frame

view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
tting to outdoor enclosure . . . . . . .
3-42
to 3-43, 3-60
tting to wall mount . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
oor mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
oor mounting bracket
attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
drilling dimensions . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
oor mounting procedure . . . . . . . .
2-17
front and rear views with components
identied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
installing using oor mounting brac
kets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
mechanical installation . . . . . . . . .
3-40
mounting options . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Index
installation and commissioning

regulatory compliance . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-5
tool list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
interface module
American safety regulations . . . . . .
3-54
view in outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . .
3-53
interface panel
outdoor enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
RF cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-46
interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
architectural constraints . . . . . . . . . 4-2
architecture of legacy Motorola hardware
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
BTS compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
further information on mixed site
conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
mixed product sites . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
mixed site receive path . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
mixed site transmit path . . . . . . . . . 4-8
points to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
special hardware for mixed sites . . . .
4-13
indoor cabinet (contd.)

powering down . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-7
powering up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
pre connection checks . . . . . . . . .
3-75
rack mounting procedure . . . . . . . .
2-26
recommended bolt length for oor
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
recommended bolt length for wall
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
view of earthing points . . . . . . . . .
2-72
wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
rrecommended bolt length . . . . . .
2-21
wall mounting bracket . . . . . . . . .
2-14
assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
with main components involved in power
up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
input power
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-85
2-85
installation
connecting bre optic cables . . . . . .
2-66
site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
L
leaving for the site . . . . . . . . . 1-23 to 1-24
lighting protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
LIU-NIU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location
GPS connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
2-69
M
maintenance cover . . . . . . . .
access. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
access restrictions . . . . . . .
manual power test
VSWR
forward . . . . . . . . . . . .
reverse . . . . . . . . . . . .
mapping
NIU to T43/BIM . . . . . . . . .
MCBM, view of . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-SURF
interconnecting cables . . . . .
Mini-SURF, interconnecting cables
mixed product sites . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
3-6
3-7
3-7
. . . .
. . . .
6-17
6-19
. . . .
. . . .
2-61
5-11
mixed site
limitations with hardware . . . . .
receive path. . . . . . . . . . . .
technical issues . . . . . . . . . .
transmit path . . . . . . . . . . .
mixed site, example of . . . . . . .
mixed sites
further conguration information .
special hardware for . . . . . . .
modulation, GMSK . . . . . . . . .
mounting brackets
oor, for indoor cabinet . . . . . .
mounting options, indoor cabinet . .
. . . .
2-32
. . . .
3-47
. . . . . 4-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-7
. . .
. . .
. . .
4-12
4-13
1-21
. . .
. . .
2-13
2-12
NIU-LIU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
N
NIU to T43/BIB
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
2-61
IX-5
Index
O
on-site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
optical bres
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting master and expansion
cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . .
protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ouput power calibrate
Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20,
additional CTU2s . . . . . . . . . . .
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ouput power change
Tx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
outdoor enclosure
a.c. cabling procedure . . . . . . . . .
a.c. power distribution module
tting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
additional internal earths . . . . . . . .
assembling the wall mounting bracket
view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
brackets for tting indoor cabinet . . .
cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cable glands
signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cable routeing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting enclosure alarms for external
alarms connector . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting power cables to . . . . . . .
decommissioning
removing a wall mounted enclosure. . .
dissassembly of . . . . . . . . . . . . .
earthing and transient protection . . . .
tting cable glands to power cables. . .
1-25
outdoor enclosure (contd.)

tting indoor cabinet to . . . . . . .
tting street furniture kit . . . . . .
oor mounting plinth . . . . . . . .
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
position of bolt holes . . . . . . .
recommended bolt length . . . . .
fully equipped
view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HMS latch operation . . . . . . . .
installation overview . . . . . . . .
installing with wall mount. . . . . .
interface panel
view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main components . . . . . . . . . .
mounting on oor standing plinth . .
mounting options . . . . . . . . . .
reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
recommended bolt length for wall
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
retting doors. . . . . . . . . . . .
retting HMS . . . . . . . . . . . .
removing doors . . . . . . . . . . .
removing HMS . . . . . . . . . . .
removing indoor cabinet from. . . .
signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . .
site earthing and ESP connection
point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
view of oor mounting plinth . . . .
view of interface plate . . . . . . .
wall mounting bracket . . . . . . .
assembling and installing . . . . .
view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
weather conditions for unpacking . .
2-62
2-64
2-64
2-62
2-63
6-24
6-25
6-21
6-21
3-67
3-37
3-65
3-25
3-43
3-14
3-52
3-62
3-49
3-61
7-8
3-33
3-30
3-66
3-42,
. .
3-13,
. .
. .
. .
3-60
3-79
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
.
.
.
.
. . 3-3
.
3-36
. . 3-2
.
3-22
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-64
. . 3-3
.
3-19
.
3-13
.
3-71
. .
3-73,
. .
3-33,
. .
. . .
. .
3-23
3-80
3-71
3-60
3-34
7-7
3-48
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-63
3-17
3-31
3-14
3-24
3-15
3-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
P
packaging crate . . . . . . .
opening . . . . . . . . . .
pinouts
external alarms connector
GPS connections . . . . .
GPS connector . . . . . .
PIX connector . . . . . . .
PIX
connector pinouts . . . . .
inputs/outputs. . . . . . .
PIX alarms
check . . . . . . . . . . .
preparation . . . . . . .
PIX connections
check . . . . . . . . . . .
reparation. . . . . . . .
IX-6
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-55, 3-49,
. . . . .
. . 3-59 to
. . . 2-56,
2-7
2-7
3-60
2-70
3-60
3-60
. . . . . 2-56, 3-60
. . . . . . .
2-56
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
6-35
6-34
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
6-35
6-34
PIX connections and alarms

commands
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
test equipment . . . . . . . . . .
power calibration
commands
site restoration . . . . . . . . .
power consumption . . . . . . . . .
power requirements. . . . . . . . .
indoor cabinet. . . . . . . . . . .
outdoor enclosure. . . . . . . . .
power supply
cable connection
view of a.c. and d.c. connectors
cable connection procedure
. . .
. . .
6-33
6-33
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-36
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-18
. . .
2-79
.
.
.
.
.
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Index
power supply (contd.)

cable connection procedure (contd.)
power test (contd.)
-48 V d.c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+27 V d.c.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
single phase a.c. . . . . . . . . . . .
when to connect main a.c. power
source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cable, colour coding. . . . . . . . . . .
cables
colour coding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tting cable glands to . . . . . . . . .
cables, safety when installing . . . . . .
connecting a.c. power . . . . 2-87, 3-76,
connecting cables to outdoor enclo
sure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting d.c. power . . . . . . . . .
insulation check on a.c. power cables. . .
request for connection . . . . . . . . . .
sample request form . . . . . . . . .
power test
forward automatic
VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
forward manual
VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
reverse automatic
VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
reverse manual
VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
power up
views of cabinet with components involved in
power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
power up procedure
with code load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
without code load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
powering up the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
primary a.c. terminal block . . . . . . . .
3-69
procedures
site verication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
procedures, pre-installation . . . . . . . . . 1-8
2-77
2-76
2-79
2-80
3-65
2-75
3-66
2-75
3-80
3-61
2-86
5-6
3-75
5-5
5-13
R
rack mount, 19 inch for indoor cabinet . .
receiver sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . .
relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removing a wall mounted cabinet . . . . . .
Request for Connection, sample form . . .
restrictions
access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
returning equipment to Motorola . . . . . .
reverse power test
VSWR
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF
combining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
conguration diagrams . . . . . . . . .
congurations
omni 1 or 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omni 2 or 4 . . . . . . . . 2-40 to 2-41,
2-15
1-21
1-13
7-6
5-13
RF (contd.)
congurations (contd.)
omni 2 or 4 with bow tie . . . . .
sector 1/1 or 2/2 . . . . . . . . .
three cabinet, sector 2/2/2 or 4/4/4
two cabinet, sector 1/1/1 or 2/2/2 .
two cabinet, sector 2/2 or 4/4 . . .
connecting RF cabling . . . . . . .
connection overview . . . . . . . .
connections to modules . . . . . . .
connector torque values . . . . . .
duplexed signals . . . . . . . . . .
power output . . . . . . . . . . . .
suggested congurations . . . . . .
types of connector . . . . . . . . .
RF specications . . . . . . . . . . .
rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
7-3
6-16
6-19
4-9
2-36
2-38
2-56
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
2-36,
. .
. .
. .
2-41
2-45
2-51
2-49
2-47
3-45
2-33
2-30
2-33
2-35
1-20
3-47
2-32
1-18
1-24
S
safety
American regulations for BIB/BIM .
commissioning . . . . . . . . . . .
safety issues
on site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sample form, Completion and Inspec
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sample form: Request for Connection .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
. .
3-54
. . . 5-4
. .
1-25
. .
. .
5-15
5-13
signal cabling . . . . . .
site
access requirements .
cross bonding . . . . .
earth electrode testing
earth electrodes. . . .
earthing. . . . . . . .
layout plan . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
3-48
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-26
1-29
1-29
1-28
2-29
1-15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
1-27,
. .
IX-7
Index
site (contd.)
site visiting (contd.)
mixed
example of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
further information on conguring . .
4-12
receive path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
special hardware for . . . . . . . . .
4-13
technical issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
transmit path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
mixed product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
outdoor foundations. . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
structural requirements. . . . . . . . . . 1-9
typical earthing plan . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
verication
test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
test lead calibration . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-6
test leads for . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-4
verication procedures . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
visiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
site expansion board . . . . . . . . . 2-65, 2-68
GPS connection location . . . . . . . .
2-69
site installation layout. . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
site owner provision. . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
base structure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
owner provision . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
site restoration
after Tx output power calibration . . . .
6-36
commands
power calibration CTU2. . . . . . . .
6-36
VSWR check CTU2 . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
site visiting
arrival. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
before leaving. . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 to 1-24
rural sites . . . . . . . .
safety . . . . . . . . . .
waste material . . . . .
slope method
earthing test . . . . . .
software requirements . .
specications . . . . . . .
access control . . . . . .
approval and safety . . .
battery backup duration
BSC connectivity . . . .
dimensions . . . . . . .
electrical and RF . . . .
environmental llimits . .
frequency bands . . . .
frequency capability . .
frequency hopping . . .
introduction to . . . . .
physical . . . . . . . . .
power consumption . . .
power requirements . .
receiver sensitivity . . .
RF power output . . . .
software requirements .
structural considerations
torque values . . . . . .
weights . . . . . . . . .
split cell operation . . . .
stages
VSWR check
CTU2 test . . . . . . .
street furniture
tting . . . . . . . . . .
kit . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
1-24
1-25
1-24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-30
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-19
1-22
1-11
1-18
1-13
1-22
1-22
1-22
1-11
1-11
1-18
1-18
1-21
1-20
1-10
1-14
1-13
1-12
4-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
1-10 to
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
. . . . . . . .
6-10
. . . . . 3-79 to 3-80
. . . . . . . .
3-77
T
T43/BIB mapping
to NIU . . . . . . . . . . .
T43/CIM
American safety regulations
interconnections . . . . . .
view . . . . . . . . . . . . .
terminal block, primary a.c. . .
test cable
PC to HIISC . . . . . . . . .
test equipment
backhaul link
check . . . . . . . . . . .
commissioning . . . . . . .
database equippage
check . . . . . . . . . . .
check . . . . . . . . . . .
IX-8
test equipment (contd.)

. . . . . .
2-61
.
.
.
.
3-54
3-60
2-59
3-69
. . . . .
2-59, 3-56,
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . . . .
5-3
. . . . . .
6-30
. . . . . . . 5-2
. . . . . .
6-27
. . . . . .
6-33
VSWR check
CTU2 . . . . . .
test stages
VSWR check
CTU2 . . . . . .
testing
earth electrodes. .
tilt switch . . . . . .
torque values . . . .
RF connectors . .
SMA connectors. .
transient protection .
Tx
channel numbers .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
. . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-29
2-55
1-13
2-33
3-48
3-32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
2-29,
. . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
Index
Tx output power
calibration . .
preparation .
preparations
change . . . .
Tx (contd.)
frequencies . . . . . .
Tx blocks
interconnecting cables
Tx ouput power
calibration . . . . . .
additional CTU2s . .
. . . . . . . . .
6-26
. . . . . . . . .
2-32
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-24
6-21
6-10
6-21
commands . . . . . . . .
preparation . . . . . . . .
test equipment . . . . . .
test stages . . . . . . . .
VSWR checks
manual forward power test
manual reverse power test
VSWR restoration
commands
site restoration . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 6-8
.
6-10
. . 6-8
.
6-10
U
unpacking the delivery crates . . . . . . . .
2-9
V
verication
site procedures
sample request form . . . .
visiting a site . . . . . . . . . .
visual inspection
pre-commisioning . . . . . . .
VSWR
calibration . . . . . . . . . .
VSWR check
automatic forward power test .
automatic reverse power test .
VSWR check (contd.)

. . . . . . 6-2
. . . . .
1-23
. . . . . .
5-5
. . . . .
6-14
. . . . .
. . . . .
6-15
6-16
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
6-17
6-19
. . . . . . .
6-36
W
wall mounting bracket
indoor cabinet. . . . . . . .
assembling . . . . . . . .
outdoor enclosure. . . . . .
wall mounting, indoor cabinet.
recommended bolt length . .
68P02903W22-D
Dec 2007
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-14
2-22
3-14
2-20
2-21
waste material on site.

weather conditions . .
access restrictions .
weights . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-24
. . 3-6
. . 3-7
.
1-12
IX-9
Standard Printing Instructions

Part Number
68P02903W22-D
Manual Title
Installation and Configuration:

Horizon II mini
Date
Dec 2007
A5 Wire Bound - GSD (UK)

Binder
None
Printing
Cover text overprinted onto Motorola supplied cover stock.
Body- printed double sided onto white A5 size (148.5mm x 210mm)

80g paper.
Photo reduce to A5.
A5 size (148.5mm x 210mm) clear PVC sheet front page for

protection.
Punched with 24 x 2mm holes or 16 x 3mm holes depending on

thickness of manual and sealed with blue wire mechanism
Bag wrapped with clear polythene.
Finishing
If this is to be used by manufacturing as an Inbox document, then refer to appropriate

Materials or Methods Specifications.
Horizon II mini
Installation & Configuration
Horizon II mini
Installation & Configuration
DEC 2007
68P02903W22-D
DEC 2007
68P02903W22-D
Cutting
datum point
Spine
Front cover

Horizon 2 Mini

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Horizon 2 Mini

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Installation and Conguration:

Installation and Conguration: Horizon II mini

Chapter 1: Introduction to Horizon II mini

Approval and safety . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2: Horizon II mini cabinet indoor installation

Installation and Conguration: Horizon II mini

- 48 to 60 V DC cable connection procedure . . . . . .

Chapter 3: Horizon II mini outdoor enclosure installation

Installation and Conguration: Horizon II mini

Chapter 4: Horizon II mini interoperability

Chapter 5: Commissioning the Horizon II mini

Introduction to Horizon II BTS verication procedures . . . .

Commissioning overview and test equipment . .

Chapter 6: Site verication procedures

Checking the database equipage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7: Decommissioning the Horizon II mini

Table 1-1: Horizon II mini tool list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-2: RF hardware equivalents for Horizon II mini, Horizon II macro,

Installation and Conguration: Horizon II

What is covered in this manual?

Understand the pre-installation site requirements and be aware of site safety.

Carry out all the necessary indoor cabinet installation procedures.

Carry out all the necessary outdoor enclosure installation procedures.

Commission the Horizon II mini.

Test and verify the installed Horizon II mini hardware equipment.

Decommission the Horizon II mini.

Refer to Service Manual, Horizon II mini (68P02903W21) for a technical description

The following sections show the revision status of this document.

Updated to include PGSM duplexer hardware.

Resolution of service requests

Incorporation of Change Notices

Special key sequences

Press the Ctrl and C keys at the same time.

Press the Ctrl, Shift, and C keys at the same time.

Press the Alt and F keys at the same time.

Press the pipe symbol key.

Press the Return or Enter key.

Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our documents.

Questions and comments

The document type

The document title, part number, and revision character

The page number with the error

A detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution

Warnings, cautions, and notes

Warnings, cautions, and notes

Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations 68P81150E62.

Power down or unplug the equipment before servicing.

Portions of Motorola equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge.

Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general

Caring for the environment

Caring for the environment

Disposal of Motorola equipment

Disposal of surplus packaging

CMM labeling and disclosure table

CMM labeling and disclosure table

Motorola document set

Motorola document set

Ordering documents and CD-ROMs

Document banner denitions

Finding information in this manual

Chapter 1: Introduction to Horizon II mini

Finding information in this manual

A full Table of Contents (TOC) is provided at the front of this manual.